2003 Infiniti QX4 - Dealer.com · 2019-07-27 · features to all occupants of the vehicle. O Always review this Owner’s Manual for important safety infor-mation. As with other vehicles

FOREWORD

Your INFINITI represents a new way of thinkingabout vehicle design. It integrates advanced engi-neering and superior craftsmanship with a simple,refined aesthetic sensitivity associated with tradi-tional Japanese culture.

The result is a different notion of luxury and beauty.The car itself is important, but so also is the senseof harmony that the vehicle evokes in its driver, andthe sense of satisfaction you feel with the INFINITI—from the way it looks and drives to the high levelof dealer service.

To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to thefullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’sManual immediately. It explains all of the features,controls and performance characteristics of yourINFINITI; it also provides important instructions andsafety information.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet isto be found in your Owner’s literature port-folio. Always carry it with you when you takeyour INFINITI to an authorized dealer. Theportfolio contents provide complete infor-mation about all warranties covering thisvehicle, the periodic maintenance required

to keep the warranties in effect as well asthe INFINITI Roadside Assistance program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Care andLemon Law Information Booklet will explainhow to resolve any concerns you may havewith your vehicle, as well as clarify yourrights under your state’s lemon law.

INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satisfyingownership experience for as long as you own yourcar. Should you have any questions regarding yourINFINITI or your INFINITI retailer, please contactour Consumer Affairs department at 1-800-662-6200. In Hawaii 1-808-836-0848 (Oahu number).In Canada 1-800-361-4792. Thank you.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVESAFELYBefore driving your vehicle please read yourOwner’s Manual carefully. This will ensurefamiliarity with controls and maintenance re-quirements, assisting you in the safe opera-tion of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETYINFORMATIONREMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rulesto help ensure a safe and comfort-able trip for you and your passen-gers!

O Never drive under the influence ofalcohol or drugs.

O Always observe posted speedlimits and never drive too fast forconditions.

O Always use your seat belts andappropriate child restraint sys-tems. Preteen children should beseated in the rear seat.

O Always provide information aboutthe proper use of vehicle safety

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

features to all occupants of thevehicle.

O Always review this Owner’sManual for important safety infor-mation.

As with other vehicles with features foroffroad use, failure to operate fourwheel drive models correctly may resultin loss of control or an accident. For ad-ditional information, see “Driving fourwheel drive safely” in the “5. Startingand driving” section.

ON-PAVEMENT ANDOFF-ROAD DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneu-ver differently from an ordinary pas-senger car because it has a highercenter of gravity for offroad use. Aswith other vehicles with features of

this type, failure to operate this ve-hicle correctly may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

For additional information, see “On-pavement and offroad driving pre-cautions” and “Avoiding collisionand rollover” in the “5. Starting anddriving” section.

MODIFICATION OF YOURVEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect its perfor-mance, safety or durability, and mayeven violate governmental regula-tions. In addition, damage or perfor-mance problems resulting frommodification may not be coveredunder INFINITI warranties.

WHEN READING THEMANUALThis manual includes information for alloptions available on this model. There-fore, you may find some informationthat does not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-tions in this manual are those in effect at thetime of printing. INFINITI reserves the right tochange specifications or design at any timewithout notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATIONABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presenceof a hazard that could cause death or

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

serious personal injury. To avoid orreduce the risk, the procedures mustbe followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presenceof a hazard that could cause minor ormoderate personal injury or damageto your vehicle. To avoid or reducethe risk, the procedures must be fol-lowed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means Do not dothis or Do not let this happen.

© 2002 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.TOKYO, JAPAN

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual may bereproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmittedin any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical,photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the priorwritten permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION65 WARNING

WARNING

Engine Exhaust, some of its constitu-ents, and certain vehicle componentscontain or emit chemicals known toState of California to cause cancerand birth defects or other reproduc-tive harm.

SII0151

Z 02.6.11/JR50-D X

Z 02.6.11/JR50-D X

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS ................... 1-1

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS .......................................................... 2-1

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS............................................ 3-1

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS .................................. 4-1

STARTING AND DRIVING................................................................... 5-1

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................. 6-1

APPEARANCE AND CARE................................................................... 7-1

DO-IT-YOURSELF ............................................................................ 8-1

MAINTENANCE ............................................................................... 9-1

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION ......................................... 10-1

INDEX ........................................................................................ 11-1

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

1 SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

Seats............................................................ 1-2Front power seat adjustment ................. 1-3Rear seat adjustment ............................. 1-4Head restraint adjustment ...................... 1-7Active head restraint (For front seats) ... 1-7Armrest................................................... 1-8

Supplemental restraint system.................... 1-8Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem.................................................... 1-8Supplemental air bag warning labels... 1-21

Supplemental air bag warning light .......... 1-21Seat belts .................................................. 1-23

Precautions on seat belt usage ........... 1-23Child safety........................................... 1-26Pregnant women .................................. 1-27Injured persons .................................... 1-27

Three-point type seat belt withretractor................................................ 1-28Two-point type seat belt without retractor(Center of rear seat)............................. 1-31Seat belt extenders .............................. 1-33Seat belt maintenance ......................... 1-34

Child restraints .......................................... 1-34Precautions on child restraints ............ 1-34Installation on rear seat centerposition................................................. 1-36Installation on rear seat outboardpositions............................................... 1-39LATCH (Lower anchors and tether for chil-dren) system ........................................ 1-44Top tether strap child restraint ............ 1-45Installation on front passenger seat.... 1-47

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SEATS

WARNING

O Do not ride in a moving vehiclewhen the seatback is reclined.

This can be dangerous. The shoul-der belt will not be against yourbody. In an accident you could bethrown into it and receive neck or

other serious injuries. You couldalso slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

O For most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, theseat should be upright. Always sitwell back in the seat and adjustthe seat belt properly. See “Pre-cautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section for precautions onseat belt usage.

See “Automatic seat positioner” in the “3.Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for au-tomatic seat positioner operation.

SIR0091

SEATS, RESTRAINTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

1-2

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUST-MENT

WARNING

O Do not adjust the driver’s seatwhile driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

O Do not leave children unattendedinside the vehicle. They couldunknowingly activate switches orcontrols which could cause a se-rious accident.

Operating tipsO The motor has an auto-reset overload

protection circuit. If the motor stops duringoperation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivatethe switch.

O Do not operate the power seat for a longperiod of time when the engine is off. This

will discharge the battery.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward willslide the seat forward or backward to thedesired position.

RecliningMoving the recline switch forward or back-ward will move the seatback forward or back-ward to the desired position.

SIR0109

SIR0110


1-3

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Seat lifter

Push the front or rear end of the switch toadjust the angle and height of the seatcushion.

Lumbar support (if so equippedfor driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lowerback support to the driver. Move the lever upor down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Before folding down the seat, put the buckle inits storage area in the seatback to avoiddropping it under the seat cushion. Folding

1. Remove the head restraints.

SIR0133

SIP0117

SIR0157


1-4

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

2. Pull the strap forward and fold the seatcushion up.

3. Pull the lever and pull the seat backforward to fold it down.

4. When resetting the seat, be sure to installthe head restraints.

WARNING

O Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area or on the rear seatwhen it is in the fold-down posi-tion. Use of these areas by pas-sengers without proper restraintscould result in serious injury in anaccident or sudden stop.

O It is extremely dangerous to ride

in a cargo area inside of a ve-hicle. In a collision, people ridingin these areas are more likely tobe seriously injured or killed.

O Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts. Be sure everyone in yourvehicle is in a seat and using aseat belt properly.

SIP0144


1-5

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O Head restraints should be ad-justed properly as they may pro-vide significant protection againstinjury in an accident. Always re-place and adjust them properly ifthey have been removed for anyreason.

O If the head restraints are removedfor any reason, they should besecurely stored to prevent themfrom causing injury to passengersor damage to the vehicle in caseof sudden braking or an accident.

O Properly secure all cargo to helpprevent it from sliding or shifting.Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop orcollision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

O When returning the seatbacks tothe upright position, be certainthey are completely secured inthe latched position. If they arenot completely secured in theright position, passengers may beinjured in an accident or suddenstop.

Reclining

Pull the reclining lever and position the

seatback at the desired angle. Release thereclining lever after positioning the seatback atthe desired angle.

WARNING

O Do not ride in a moving vehiclewhen the seatback is reclined.This can be dangerous. The shoul-der belt will not be against yourbody. In an accident you could bethrown into it and receive neck orother serious injuries. You couldalso slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

O For most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, theseat should be upright. Always sitwell back in the seat and adjustthe seat belt properly. See “Seatbelts” later in this section for

SIP0145


1-6

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

precautions on seat belt usage.

O After adjustment, check to besure the seat is securely locked.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUST-MENT

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjustedproperly as they may provide signifi-cant protection against injury in anaccident. Do not remove them. Checkthe adjustment after someone elseuses the seat.

Adjust the head restraints so the center is levelwith the center of your ears.

To raise the head restraint, just pull it up. Tolower, push the lock knob and push the headrestraint down.

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (Forfront seats)

WARNING

O Always adjust the head restraintsproperly as specified in the previ-

SIR0088B

SIR0144

SIR0113


1-7

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

ous section. Failure to do so canreduce the effectiveness of theactive head restraint.

O Active head restraints are de-signed to supplement other safetysystems. Always wear seat belts.No system can prevent all injuriesin any accident.

O Do not attach anything to the headrestraint stalks. Doing so couldimpair active head restraint func-tion.

The head restraint moves forward utilizing theforce that the seatback receives from theoccupant in a rear-end collision. The move-ment of the head restraint helps support theoccupant’s head by reducing its backwardmovement and helping absorb some of theforces that may lead to whiplash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for colli-sions at low to medium speeds in which it issaid that whiplash injury occurs most.

Active head restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, thehead restraints return to their original posi-tions.

Properly adjust the active head restraints asdescribed in the previous section.

ARMREST

Pull the armrest forward and lay it horizontal.

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLE-MENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)section contains important information con-cerning the driver and front passenger supple-mental front air bags, supplemental side airbags and pre-tensioner seat belts.Supplemental front air bag system: Thissystem can help cushion the impact force tothe face and chest of the driver and frontpassenger in certain frontal collisions.Supplemental side air bag system: Thissystem can help cushion the impact force tothe head and chest area of the driver and frontpassenger in certain side impact collisions.The supplemental side air bag is designed toinflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-

SIP0321


1-8

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

signed to supplement the crash protectionprovided by the driver and front passengerseat belts and are not a substitute for them.Seat belts should always be correctly wornand the driver and front passenger seated asuitable distance away from the steeringwheel, instrument panel and front door finish-ers. (See “Seat belts” later in this section forinstructions and precautions on seat beltusage.)

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the systems areoperational.

WARNING

O The supplemental front air bagsordinarily will not inflate in theevent of a side impact, rear im-

pact, roll over, or lower severityfrontal collision. Always wearyour seat belts to help reduce therisk or severity of injury in variouskinds of accidents.

SIR0092


1-9

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O The seat belts and the supple-mental front air bags are mosteffective when you are sittingwell back and upright in the seat.Front air bags inflate with

great force. If you are unre-strained, leaning forward, sittingsideways or out of position in anyway, you are at greater risk of in-jury or death in a crash and may

also receive serious or fatal inju-ries from the supplemental frontair bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit backagainst the seatback and as far

SIR0093 SIR0006


1-10

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

away as practical from the steer-ing wheel or instrument panel. Al-ways use the seat belts.

O Keep hands on the outside of thesteering wheel. Placing them in-

side the steering wheel rim couldincrease the risk that they are in-jured when the supplemental frontair bag inflates.

SIR0007 SIR0008 SIR0009


1-11

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WARNING

O Never let children ride unre-strained or extend their hands orface out of the window. Do not at-tempt to hold them in your lap orarms. Some examples of danger-ous riding positions are shown inthe previous illustrations.

O Children may be severely injuredor killed when the supplementalfront air bag or supplemental sideair bag inflates if they are notproperly restrained. Preteens andchildren should be properly re-strained in the rear seat if pos-sible.

O Never install a rear facing childrestraint in the front seat. An

SIR0010 SIR0011


1-12

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

inflating supplemental front airbag could seriously injury or killyour child. See “Child restraints”later in this section for details.

For supplemental side air bagsystem :

SIR0059

SIR0094

SIR0121

SIR0122


1-13

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WARNING

O The supplemental side air bag or-dinarily will not inflate in the eventof a frontal impact, rear impact orlower severity side collision. Al-ways wear your seat belts to helpreduce the risk or severity of injuryin various kinds of accidents.

O The seat belts and the supple-mental side air bag are mosteffective when you are sittingwell back and upright in the seat.Supplemental side air bag in-flates with great force. Do notallow anyone to place their hand,leg or face near the supplementalside air bag on the side of theseatback of the front seat. Do notallow anyone sitting in the front

seat to extend their hand out ofthe window or lean against thedoor. Some examples of danger-ous riding positions are shown inthe previous illustrations.

When sitting in the rear seat, donot hold onto the seatback of thefront seat. If the side air baginflates, you may be seriouslyinjured. Be especially carefulwith children, who should alwaysbe properly restrained.

O Do not use seat covers on thefront seatbacks. They may inter-fere with side air bag inflation.


1-14

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Supplemental front air bag sys-tem

The driver supplemental air bag is located inthe center of the steering wheel; the frontpassenger supplemental air bag is mounted inthe dashboard above the glove box. Thesesystems are designed to meet optional certi-

fication requirements under U.S. regulations.They are also permitted in Canada. Theoptional certification allows front air bags tobe designed to inflate somewhat less force-fully than previously. However, all of theinformation, cautions and warnings inthis manual still apply and must befollowed. The front air bags are designed to

inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,although they may inflate if the forces inanother type of collision are similar to those ofa higher severity frontal impact. They may notinflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicledamage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental air bagoperation.

When the supplemental front air bag inflates,a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed byrelease of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire, but care shouldbe taken not to inhale it, as it may causeirritation and choking. Those with a history ofbreathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along with theuse of seat belts, help to cushion the impactforce on the face and chest of the occupants.They can help save lives and reduce seriousinjuries. However, an inflating front air bagmay cause facial abrasions or other injuries.Front air bags do not provide restraint to the

SIR0106B


1-15

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn andthe driver and passenger seated upright as faras practical away from the steering wheel ordash board. Since the supplemental front airbags inflate quickly in order to help protect thefront occupants, the force of the front air baginflating can increase the risk of injury if theoccupant is too close to or is against the airbag module during inflation. The air bag willdeflate quickly after the collision is over.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

O Do not place any objects on thesteering wheel pad or on the in-strument panel. Also, do not

place any objects between anyoccupant and the steering wheelor instrument panel. Such objectsmay become dangerous projec-tiles and may cause injury if thesupplemental air bag inflates.

O Right after inflation, several airbag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you mayseverely burn yourself.

O No unauthorized changes shouldbe made to any components orwiring of the supplemental frontair bag system. This is to preventaccidental inflation of the supple-mental air bags or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

O Do not make unauthorizedchanges to your vehicle’s electri-cal system, suspension system or

front end structure. This couldaffect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag sys-tem.

O Tampering with the supplementalfront air bag system may result inserious personal injury. Tamper-ing includes changes to the steer-ing wheel and the instrumentpanel assembly by placing mate-rial over the steering wheel padand above the instrument panel,or by installing additional trimmaterial around the air bag sys-tem.

O Work around and on the supple-mental front air bag systemshould be done by an authorizedINFINITI retailer. Installation ofelectrical equipment should also


1-16

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

be done by an authorized INFINITIretailer. The yellow Supplemen-tal Restraint System (SRS) wiringharnesses* should not be modi-fied or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipmentand probing devices should notbe used on the air bag system.

O A cracked windshield should bereplaced immediately by a quali-fied repair facility. A crackedwindshield could affect inflationof the supplemental air bag sys-tem.

* The SRS wiring harnesses arecovered with yellow insulation ei-ther just before the harness con-nectors or over the complete har-ness for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the supplemental airbag system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Supplemental side air bag system

The supplemental side air bags are located inthe outside of the seatback of the front seats.The supplemental side air bag (on the driveror front passenger seat) is designed to inflatein higher severity side collisions, although itmay inflate if the forces in another type ofcollision are similar to those of a higherseverity side impact. It is designed to inflate

on the side where the vehicle is impacted. Itmay not inflate in certain side collisions.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental side air bagoperation.

When the supplemental side air bag inflates, afairly loud noise may be heard, followed byrelease of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire, but care shouldbe taken not to inhale it, as it may causeirritation and choking. Those with a history ofa breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Supplemental side air bags along with the useof seat belts, help to cushion the impact forceon the head and chest of the front occupants.They can help save lives and reduce seriousinjuries. However, an inflating side air bagmay cause abrasions or other injuries. Side airbags do not provide restraint to the lowerbody.

The seat belts should be correctly worn andthe driver and passenger seated upright as far

SIR0129


1-17

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

as practical away from the supplemental sideair bag. Since the side air bags inflate quicklyin order to help protect the front occupants,the force of the side air bag inflating canincrease the risk of injury if the occupant istoo close to or is against the side air bagmodule during inflation. The side air bag willdeflate quickly after the collision is over.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

O Do not place any objects near theseatback of the front seats. Also,do not place any objects (an um-brella, bag, etc.) between thefront door finisher and the frontseat. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and causeinjury if the supplemental side airbag inflates.

O Right after inflation, several sideair bag system components willbe hot. Do not touch them; youmay severely burn yourself.

O No unauthorized changes shouldbe made to any components orwiring of the side air bag system.This is to prevent accidental in-flation of the side air bags ordamage to the side air bag sys-tem.

O Do not make unauthorizedchanges to your vehicle’s electri-cal system, suspension system orside panel. This could affectproper operation of the side airbag system.

O Tampering with the side air bagsystem may result in serious per-sonal injury. Tampering includeschanges to the front seats assem-bly by placing material near theseatback of the front seat, or byinstalling additional trim mate-rial, such as seat covers, aroundthe side air bag system.

O Work around and on the supple-mental side air bag systemshould be done by an authorizedINFINITI retailer. Installation ofelectrical equipment should alsobe done by an authorized INFINITIretailer. The SRS wiring har-nesses* should not be modifiedor disconnected. Unauthorizedelectrical test equipment andprobing devices should not beused on the side air bag system.


1-18

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

* The SRS wiring harnesses arecovered with yellow insulation ei-ther just before the harness con-nectors or over the complete har-ness for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental sideair bag system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system(For front seats)

WARNING

O The pre-tensioner seat belt cannotbe reused after activation. It mustbe replaced together with the re-tractor as a unit.

O If the vehicle becomes involved in

a frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sureto have the pre-tensioner systemchecked and, if necessary, re-placed by your INFINITI retailer.

O No unauthorized changes shouldbe made to any components orwiring of the pre-tensioner seatbelt system. This is to preventaccidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage tothe pre-tensioner seat belt opera-tion. Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat belt system mayresult in serious personal injury.

O Work around and on the pre-tensioner system should be doneby an authorized INFINITI re-tailer. Installation of electricalequipment should also be done

by an authorized INFINITI re-tailer. Unauthorized electricaltest equipment and probing de-vices should not be used on thepre-tensioner seat belt system.

O If you need to dispose of thepre-tensioner or scrap the ve-hicle, contact an authorizedINFINITI retailer. Correct preten-sioner disposal procedures areset forth in the appropriateINFINITI Service Manual. Incor-rect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt systemactivates in conjunction with the supplementalfront air bag. Working with the seat beltretractor, it helps tighten the seat belt theinstant the vehicle becomes involved in cer-tain types of collisions, thereby restrainingseat occupants.


1-19

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seatbelt’s retractor. These seat belts are used thesame as conventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,smoke is released and a loud noise may beheard. The smoke is not harmful, but careshould be taken not to inhale it as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with ahistory of a breathing condition should getfresh air promptly.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensionersystem, the supplemental air bag warninglight will not come on, will flash inter-mittently or will turn on for 7 seconds andremain on after the ignition key has beenturned to the ON or START position. In thiscase, the pre-tensioner seat belt may notfunction properly. The system should beinspected by an authorized INFINITI retailer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat

belt system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.


1-20

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELS

The warning labels about the supplemental airbag system and supplemental side air bagsystem are placed in the vehicle.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, dis-playing in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits of the supplemental front airbag and supplemental side air bag systemsand pre-tensioner seat belt. The circuits moni-tored by the air bag warning light are thediagnosis sensor unit, satellite sensors, frontair bag modules, side air bag modules,pre-tensioner seat belt and all related wiring.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

SIR0096D

SIR0132


1-21

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

position, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bag and supplementalside air bag systems and pre-tensioner seatbelt need servicing:

O The supplemental air bag warning lightremains on after approximately 7 seconds.

O The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

O The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplementalfront air bags, supplemental side air bagsand/or pre-tensioner seat belt may not operateproperly. They must be checked and repaired.Take your vehicle to the nearest authorizedINFINITI retailer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warninglight is on, it could mean that thesupplemental front air bag system,supplemental side air bag systemand/or pre-tensioner seat belt willnot operate in an accident.

Repair and replacement proce-dure

The supplemental front air bags or supple-mental side air bags are designed to inflate ona one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unlessit is damaged, the supplemental air bagwarning light will remain illuminated afterinflation has occurred. Repair and replacementof these supplemental systems should bedone only by authorized INFINITI retailers.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the supplemental front air bags,supplemental side air bags and related partsshould be pointed out to the person conduct-ing the maintenance. The ignition key shouldalways be in the LOCK position when workingunder the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

O Once the supplemental front airbag or supplemental side air bagand/or pre-tensioner seat belthave activated, the front air bagmodule will not function again andmust be replaced, additionally, ifany of the supplemental air bagsinflate, the pre-tensioner seatbelts must also be replaced. Theair bag module should be replacedby an authorized INFINITI retailer.The air bag module cannot berepaired.


1-22

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O The supplemental front air bagand supplemental side air bagsystem should be inspected by anauthorized INFINITI retailer ifthere is any damage to the frontor side end portion of the vehicleor replaced if the supplementalair bag has inflated.

O If you need to dispose of thesesupplemental systems or scrapthe vehicle, contact an authorizedINFINITI retailer.

Correct disposal procedures areset forth in the appropriateINFINITI Service Manual. Incor-rect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.

SEAT BELTS

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGE

Your chances of being injured or killed in anaccident and/or the severity of injury may begreatly reduced if you are wearing your seatbelt and it is properly adjusted. INFINITI

strongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes asupplemental air bag.

SIR0125


1-23

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Most states, provinces or territories re-quire that seat belts be worn at all timeswhen a vehicle is being driven.

WARNING

O Every person who drives or rides

in this vehicle should use a seatbelt at all times. Children shouldbe properly restrained in the rearseat and, if appropriate, in a childrestraint.

O The belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to doso may reduce the effectiveness ofthe entire restraint system and in-crease the chance or severity of

SIR0102 SIR0016


1-24

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

injury in an accident. Serious in-jury or death can occur if the seatbelt is not worn properly.

O Always route the shoulder beltover your shoulder and across

your chest. Never run the beltunder your arm or across yourneck. The belt should be awayfrom your face and neck, but notfalling off your shoulder.

O Position the lap belt as low andsnug as possible around the hips,not the waist. A lap belt worn toohigh could increase the risk ofinternal injuries in an accident.

O Be sure the seat belt tongue issecurely fastened to the properbuckle.

O Do not wear the belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

O Do not allow more than one per-son to use the same belt.

O Never carry more people in thevehicle than there are seat belts.

O If the seat belt warning lightglows continuously while the ig-nition is turned ON with all doorsclosed and all seat belts fas-tened, it may indicate a malfunc-tion in the system. Have the sys-tem checked by your INFINITIretailer.

O Once the pre-tensioner seat belthas activated, it cannot be reusedand must be replaced togetherwith the retractor. See yourINFINITI retailer.

O Removal and installation of thepre-tensioner seat belt systemcomponents should be done by anauthorized INFINITI retailer.

SIR0014


1-25

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O All seat belt assemblies includingretractors and attaching hardwareshould be inspected after any col-lision by your INFINITI retailer.INFINITI recommends that allseat belt assemblies in use dur-ing a collision be replaced unlessthe collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and con-tinue to operate properly. Seatbelt assemblies not in use duringa collision should also be in-spected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation isnoted.

O All child restraints and attachinghardware should be inspected af-ter any collision. Always followthe restraint manufacturer’s in-spection instructions and replace-ment recommendations. The

child restraints should be re-placed if they are damaged.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protectthem. They need to be properly re-strained.

The proper restraint depends on the child’ssize. Generally, infants [up to about 1 year andless than 20 lbs. (9 kg)] should be placed inrear facing child restraints. Front facing childrestraints are available for children who out-grow rear facing child restraints.

WARNING

Infants and children need specialprotection. The vehicle’s seat beltsmay not fit them properly. The shoul-

der belt may come too close to theface or neck. The lap belt may not fitover their small hip bones. In anaccident, an improperly fitting seatbelt could cause serious or fatalinjury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All US states and provinces of Canada requirethe use of approved child restraints for infantsand small children. (See “Child restraints”later in this section.)

In addition, there are many types of childrestraints available for larger children whichshould be used for maximum protection.

INFINITI recommends that all preteensand children be restrained in the rearseat if possible. According to accidentstatistics, children are safer when prop-erly restrained in the rear seat than inthe front seat.


1-26

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

This is especially important becauseyour vehicle has a supplemental re-straint system (Air bag system) for thefront passenger. See “Supplemental re-straint system” earlier in this section forprecautions.

Infants and small childrenINFINITI recommends that infants and smallchildren be placed in child restraints thatcomply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. You should choose a child re-straint that fits your vehicle and always followthe manufacturer’s instructions for installationand use.

Larger childrenChildren who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seatbelts which are provided.

If the child’s seating position has a shoulderbelt that fits close to the face or neck, the use

of a booster seat (commercially available) mayhelp overcome this. The booster seat shouldraise the child so that the shoulder belt isproperly positioned across the top, middleportion of the shoulder and the lap belt is lowon the hips. The booster seat should fit thevehicle seat and have a label certifying that itcomplies with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. Once the child has grown so theshoulder belt is no longer on or near the faceand neck, use the shoulder belt without thebooster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel onany seat and do not allow a child inthe cargo areas while the vehicle ismoving. The child could be seriouslyinjured or killed in an accident or

sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMENINFINITI recommends that pregnant womenuse seat belts. The seat belt should be wornsnug, and always position the lap belt as lowas possible around the hips, not the waist, andplace the shoulder belt over your shoulder andacross your chest. Never run the lap/shoulderbelt over your abdominal area. Contact yourdoctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONSINFINITI recommends that injured personsuse seat belts, depending on the injury. Checkwith your doctor for specific recommenda-tions.


1-27

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

O Every person who drives or ridesin this vehicle should use a seatbelt at all times.

O Do not ride in a moving vehiclewhen the seatback is reclined.This can be dangerous. Theshoulder belt will not be againstyour body. In an accident youcould be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious inju-ries. You could also slide underthe lap belt and receive seriousinternal injuries.

O For most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sitwell back in the seat and adjustthe seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilit snaps.

SIR0130

SIR0131


1-28

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

The retractor is designed to lock duringa sudden stop or on impact. A slow pull-ing motion will permit the belt to move,and allow you some freedom of move-ment in the seat.

3. Position the lap belt portion low andsnug on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack.

The front passenger side seat belt and rearthree-point seat belts have a cinching mecha-nism for child restraint installation. It is

referred to as the automatic locking mode.When the cinching mechanism is activated theseat belt cannot be withdrawn again until theseat belt tongue is detached from the buckleand fully retracted. For additional informationsee “Child Restraints” later in this section.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installation.During normal seat belt use by a pas-senger, the locking mode should not beactivated. If it is activated it may causeuncomfortable seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, becertain that seatbacks are completelysecured in the latched position. Ifthey are not completely secured inthe right position, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden

SIR0019 SIR0061


1-29

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

stop.

Unfastening the seat beltsTo unfasten the belt, press the button on thebuckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed to lockbelt movement by two separate methods:

O When the belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

O When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

You can check their operation as follows:

O Grasp the shoulder belt and pull quicklyforward. The retractor should lock andrestrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this checkor if you have any question about beltoperation, see your INFINITI retailer.

Shoulder belt height adjustment(For front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should beadjusted to the position best for you. See“Seat belts” for precautions on seat beltusage.

To adjust, pull the release buttons, and movethe shoulder belt anchor to the desired posi-tion, so the belt passes over the center of theshoulder. The belt should be away from yourface and neck, but not falling off of yourshoulder. Release the adjustment buttons tolock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

WARNING

O After adjustment, release the ad-SIR0021

SIR0075


1-30

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

justment buttons and try to movethe shoulder belt anchor up anddown to make sure it is securelyfixed in position.

O The shoulder belt anchor heightshould be adjusted to the positionbest for you. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of theentire restraint system and in-crease the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

Seat belt hook

When the rear seat belt is not in use, hook itat the belt hook.

TWO-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITHOUT RETRACTOR (Centerof rear seat)

Selecting correct set of seat belts

The center seat belt buckle and tongue areidentified by the “CENTER” mark. The centerseat belt tongue can be fastened only into the

SIP0191

SIP0078


1-31

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

center seat belt buckle.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Insert the tongue into the buckle markedCENTER until it snaps.

2. To lengthen, hold the tongue at a rightangle to the belt and pull on the belt.

To shorten, pull the free end of the beltaway from the tongue, then pull the beltclip to take up the slack.

SIR0023

SIR0024 SIR0025


1-32

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

3. Position the lap belt low and snug onthe hips as illustrated.

Unfastening the seat beltsTo unfasten the belt, press the button on thebuckle.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, itis not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulderbelt and fasten it, an extender is availablewhich is compatible with the installed seatbelts. The extender adds approximately 8 in(200 mm) of length and may be used for eitherthe driver or front passenger seating position.See your INFINITI retailer for assistance if theextender is required.

WARNING

O Only INFINITI belt extenders,made by the same company whichmade the original equipmentbelts, should be used with theINFINITI belts.

O Adults and children who can usethe standard seat belt should not

SIR0060

SIR0026


1-33

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

use an extender. Such unneces-sary use could result in seriouspersonal injury in the event of anaccident.

O Never use seat belt extenders toinstall child restraints. If the childrestraint is not secured properly,the child could be seriously in-jured in a collision or a suddenstop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

O To clean the seat belt webbings,apply a mild soap solution or any non-caustic solution recommended for gentlycleaning cloth upholstery or carpets. Thenbrush it, wipe with a cloth and allow it todry in the shade. Do not allow the seatbelts to retract until they are completelydry.

O If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guideof the seat belt anchors, the belts mayretract slowly. Wipe the shoulder beltguide with a clean, dry cloth.

O Periodically check to see that theseat belt and the metal componentssuch as buckles, tongues, retractors, flex-ible wires and anchors work properly. Ifloose parts, deterioration, cuts or otherdamage on the webbing are found, theentire belt assembly should be replaced.

CHILD RESTRAINTSPRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE-STRAINTS

WARNING

O Infants and small children shouldalways be placed in an appropri-ate child restraint while riding in

the vehicle. Failure to use a childrestraint can result in serious in-jury or death.

O Infants and small children shouldnever be carried on your lap. It isnot possible for even the stron-gest adult to resist the forces of asevere accident. The child couldbe crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do notput the same seat belt aroundboth your child and yourself.

O Never install a rear facing childrestraint in the front seat. Aninflating supplemental front airbag could seriously injure or killyour child. A rear facing childrestraint must only be used in therear seat.

O INFINITI recommends that the


1-34

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

child restraint be installed in therear seat. According to accidentstatistics, children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rearseat than in the front seat.

O An improperly installed child re-straint could lead to serious in-jury or death in an accident.

In general, child restraints are designed to beinstalled with a lap belt or the lap portion of athree point type seat belt. Child restraints forinfants and children of various sizes are offeredby several manufacturers. When selecting anychild restraint system, keep the followingpoints in mind:

O Choose only a restraint with a label certi-fying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

O Check the child restraint in your vehicle tobe sure it is compatible with the vehicle’sseat and seat belt system.

O If the child restraint is compatible withyour vehicle, place your child in the childrestraint and check the various adjust-ments to be sure the child restraint iscompatible with your child. Always followall recommended procedures.

All US states and Canadian provincesrequire that infants and small childrenbe restrained in approved child restraintsystems at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

WARNING

O Improper use of a child restraintcan result in increased injuries forboth the infant or child and other

occupants in the vehicle.

O Follow all of the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions forinstallation and use. When pur-chasing a child restraint, be sureto select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not bepossible to properly install sometypes of child restraints in yourvehicle.

O If the child restraint seat is notanchored properly, the risk of achild being injured in a collisionor a sudden stop greatly in-creases.

O Adjustable seatbacks should bepositioned to fit the child re-straint, but as upright aspossible.


1-35

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O After attaching the child restraint,test it before you place the childin it. Tilt it from side to side. Tryto tug it forward and check to seeif the belt holds the restraint inplace. If the restraint is not se-cure, tighten the belt as neces-sary, or put the restraint in an-other seat and test it again.

O For a front facing child restraint,if the seat position where it isinstalled has a three-point typelap/shoulder belt, check to makesure the shoulder belt does not goin front of the child’s face or neck.If it does, put the shoulder beltbehind the child restraint. If youmust install a front facing childrestraint in the front seat, see“Installation on front passengerseat” later in this section for

details.

O When your child restraint is not inuse, store it in the trunk or keep itsecured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown aroundin case of a sudden stop or acci-dent.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint leftin a closed vehicle can become veryhot. Check the seating surface andbuckles before placing your child inthe child restraint.

INSTALLATION ON REAR SEATCENTER POSITION

Front facingWhen you install a child restraint in a rearcenter seat, follow these steps:


1-36

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

1. Position the child restraint on the seat asillustrated. The direction of the child re-straint depends on the type of the childrestraint and the size of the child. Alwaysfollow the restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into the buckleuntil you hear and feel the latch engage. Besure to follow the child restraint manufac-turer’s instructions for belt routing.

3. Remove all slack in the lap belt for a verytight fit by pulling forcefully on the lap beltadjustment.

SIR0027 SIR0029 SIR0030


1-37

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

4. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, use force to tilt the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward tomake sure it is securely held in place.

5. If it is not secure, try to tighten the beltagain, or put the restraint in another seat.

6. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use.

Rear facingWhen you install a child restraint in a rearcenter seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat asillustrated. The direction of the child re-straint depends on the type of the child

restraint and the size of the child. Alwaysfollow the restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into the buckleuntil you hear and feel the latch engage. Besure to follow the child restraint manufac-

SIR0031

SIR0033

SIR0035


1-38

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

turer’s instructions for belt routing.

3. Remove all slack in the lap belt for a verytight fit by pulling forcefully on the lap beltadjustment.

4. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, use force to tilt the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward tomake sure that it is securely held in place.

5. If it is not secure, try to tighten the beltagain, or put the restraint in another seat.

6. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use.

INSTALLATION ON REAR SEATOUTBOARD POSITIONS

Front facing

WARNING

O The three-point belt in your ve-hicle is equipped with a lockingmode retractor which must beused when installing a child re-straint.

O Failure to do so will result in thechild restraint not being properlysecured. It could tip over or oth-erwise be unsecured and causeinjury to the child in a suddenstop or collision.

When you install a child restraint in a rearoutboard seat, follow these steps:

SIR0036

SIR0037


1-39

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Thedirection of the child restraint depends onthe type of the child restraint and the sizeof the child. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into the buckleuntil you hear and feel the latch engage.Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of thebelt is fully extended. At this time, the beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts back toemergency locking mode when the buckleis unlatched and the belt is allowed to fullyretract.

SIR0041 SIR0043 SIR0039A


1-40

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the beltto remove any slack in the belt.


6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull any

more belt webbing out of the retractor, thebelt is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thebelt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through6.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is allowed to wind back into theretractor, the automatic locking mode (childrestraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt onlylocks during a sudden stop or impact.

Rear facing

WARNING

O The three-point belt on your ve-hicle is equipped with a lockingmode retractor which must beused when installing a childrestraint.

SIR0062 SIR0042


1-41

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O Failure to do so will result in thechild restraint not being properlysecured. It could tip over or oth-erwise be unsecured and causeinjury to the child in a suddenstop or collision.

When you install a child restraint in a rearoutboard seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Thedirection of the child restraint depends onthe type of the child restraint and the sizeof the child. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into the buckleuntil you hear and feel the latch engage.Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

SIR0044 SIR0046


1-42

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of thebelt is fully extended. At this time, the beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts back toemergency locking mode when the belt isfully retracted.




SIR0045A SIR0047 SIR0048


1-43

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X


7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thebelt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through6.


LATCH (LOWER ANCHORSAND TETHER FOR CHILDREN)SYSTEM

WARNING

O Attach LATCH system compatiblechild restraints only at the loca-tions shown. If a child restraint isnot secured properly, your childcould be seriously injured or killedin an accident.

O Do not secure a child restraint inthe center rear seating positionusing the child restraint loweranchors. The child restraint willnot be secured properly.

O The LATCH system anchors aredesigned to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-stance are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses.

Some child restraints include two rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can beconnected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. This systemis known as the LATCH (Lower Anchors andTether for Children) system. This system mayalso be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIXcompatible system. With this system, you donot have to use a vehicle seat belt to securethe child restraint. Your vehicle is equippedwith special anchor points that are used withLATCH system compatible child restraints.Check your child restraint for a label statingthat it is compatible with the LATCH system.This information may also be in the childrestraint owner’s manual. If you have such achild restraint, refer to the illustration for theseating positions equipped with LATCH sys-

SIR0158


1-44

Z 02.9.12/JR50-D X

tem anchors which can be used to secure thechild restraint.

The LATCH system anchors are located at therear of the seat cushion near the seatback. Alabel is attached to the seatback to help youlocate the LATCH system anchors.

Some child restraints may also require the useof a top tether strap. See “Top tether strapchild restraint” later in this section for instal-lation instructions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint.

When you install a LATCH system compatiblechild restraint to the lower anchor attach-ments, follow these steps.

WARNING

Inspect the lower anchors by insert-

ing your fingers into the loweranchor area and feeling to makesure there are no obstructionsover the LATCH system anchors,such as seat belt webbing or seatcushion material. The child re-straint will not be secured prop-erly if the LATCH system anchorsare obstructed.

1. To install the LATCH system compatiblechild restraint, adjust the height of thechild restraint LATCH system anchor at-tachments to the anchor points on the seat.

2. Insert the anchor attachments into theanchor points. If the child restraint isequipped with a top tether, see “Top tetherstrap child restraint” later in this sectionfor installation instructions.

3. After attaching the child restraint andbefore placing the child in it, use force to

tilt the child restraint from side to side andtug it forward to make sure that the childrestraint is securely held in place.

4. Check to make sure that the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE-STRAINT

SIR0070


1-45

Z 02.9.12/JR50-D X

WARNING

O The child restraint anchor pointsare designed to withstand onlythose loads imposed by correctlyfitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be usedfor adult seat belts or harnesses.

O The top tether strap may be dam-aged by contact with the tonneaucover or items in the cargo area.Remove the tonneau cover fromthe vehicle or secure it and anycargo. Your child could be seri-ously injured or killed in a colli-sion if the top tether strap isdamaged.

If your child restraint has a top tether strap, itmust be secured to the provided anchor point.

Secure the child restraint with the center lapbelt or the lap portion of an outboard three-point belt and latch the top strap hook ontothe anchor bracket.

Secure the top strap to the anchor bracketwhich provides the straightest installation ofthe top strap. Tighten the strap according tothe manufacture’s instructions to remove anyslack.

Anchor point locations

WARNING

The anchor bolt should be installed atall times to prevent the possibility ofexhaust fumes entering the passen-ger compartment through the holes.See “Precautions when starting anddriving” in the “5. Starting and driv-ing” section for exhaust gas.

Anchor points are located under the carpet ofthe rear luggage area floor.

When installing a top strap child restraint onthe rear seat for the first time, consult yourINFINITI retailer for details.

SIR0140B


1-46

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

INSTALLATION ON FRONTPASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

O Never install a rear facing child

restraint in the front passengerseat. Supplemental front air bagsinflate with great force. A rear

facing child restraint could bestruck by the front air bag in acrash and could seriously injureor kill your child.

O INFINITI recommends that childrestraints be installed in the rearseat. However, if you must installa front facing child restraint in thefront passenger seat, move thepassenger seat to the rear-mostposition.

O A child restraint with a top tetherstrap should not be used in thefront passenger seat.

O The three-point belt in your ve-hicle is equipped with a lockingmode retractor which must beused when installing a childrestraint.

SIR0101


1-47

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O Failure to use the retractor’s lock-ing mode may result in the childrestraint not being properly se-cured. The child restraint couldtip over or otherwise be unse-cured and cause injury to thechild in a sudden stop orcollision.

Front facing

If you must install a child restraint in the frontseat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the frontpassenger seat. It should be placed in afront facing direction only. Move theseat to the rear most position. Always follow

the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions. Child restraints for infants mustbe used in the rear facing directionand therefore must not be used in thefront seat.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into the buckle

SIR0103

SIR0055


1-48

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

until you hear and feel the latch engage.Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of thebelt is fully extended. At this time, the beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts back to

emergency locking mode when the belt isfully retracted.




SIR0053A

SIR0056

SIR0063


1-49

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X


7. Check to make sure that the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use. If thelap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 6.



1-50

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instrument panel ......................................... 2-2Meters and gauges ...................................... 2-3

Speedometer and odometer................... 2-4Tachometer............................................. 2-4Engine coolant temperature gauge ........ 2-5Fuel gauge .............................................. 2-5

Compass and outside temperaturedisplay ........................................................ 2-6

Outside temperature display .................. 2-6Compass display.................................... 2-7

Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders................................................... 2-10

Checking bulbs..................................... 2-10Warning lights ...................................... 2-10Indicator lights ..................................... 2-15Audible reminders ................................ 2-17

Security systems ....................................... 2-18Vehicle security system ....................... 2-18Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System .... 2-19

Windshield wiper and washer switch........ 2-21Rear window wiper and washer switch .... 2-21Glass hatch and outside mirror defoggerswitch ........................................................ 2-22Headlight and turn signal switch............... 2-23

Xenon headlights.................................. 2-23Headlight switch................................... 2-24Turn signal switch................................ 2-27

Front fog light switch ................................ 2-27Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-28Horn........................................................... 2-28Heated seats (if so equipped)................... 2-29Clock .......................................................... 2-30

Adjusting the time ................................ 2-30Power outlet .............................................. 2-30Cigarette lighter and ashtray ..................... 2-31Storage ...................................................... 2-32

Tray ...................................................... 2-32Coin box (if so equipped) .................... 2-32

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Sunglasses holder ................................ 2-32Cup holders .......................................... 2-33Glove box ............................................. 2-34Console box.......................................... 2-34Luggage storage................................... 2-35Luggage hooks..................................... 2-36Cargo net.............................................. 2-38Tonneau cover...................................... 2-38Luggage rack (if so equipped)............. 2-40

Windows .................................................... 2-40Power windows.................................... 2-41

Sunroof (if so equipped) ........................... 2-42Electric sunroof .................................... 2-42

Interior lights (if so equipped) .................. 2-45

Personal light............................................. 2-46Vanity mirror lights.................................... 2-47HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver ............. 2-47

Programming HomeLinkT .................... 2-48Programming HomeLinkT for CanadianCustomers ............................................ 2-50Operating the HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver ........................................... 2-50Programming trouble-diagnosis........... 2-50Clearing the programmedinformation........................................... 2-50Reprogramming a single HomeLinkTbutton ................................................... 2-51If your vehicle is stolen........................ 2-51

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SII0290

INSTRUMENT PANEL

See the page indicated in parentheses for operating details.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2-2

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SII0401

METERS AND GAUGES


2-3

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOM-ETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer are dis-played when the ignition key is in the ONposition.

The odometer records the total distance thevehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

Changing the display :

Pushing the reset knob changes the display asfollows:

TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer :

Pushing the reset knob for more than 1second resets the trip odometer to zero.

TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute (r/min).

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches thered zone, shift to a higher gear. Op-erating the engine in the red zonemay cause serious engine damage.

SII0292

SII0259


2-4

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-TURE GAUGEThe gauge indicates engine coolant tempera-ture.

Engine coolant temperature will vary with theoutside air temperature and driving condi-tions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolanttemperature over the normal range,stop the vehicle as soon as safelypossible. If the engine is overheated,continued operation of the vehiclemay seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the“6. In case of emergency” section forimmediate action required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or downhill.

The gauge needle is designed to move to theE (Empty) position when the ignition key isturned to the OFF position.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-isters Empty.

The low fuel warning light comes onwhen the fuel tank is getting low. Refuelas soon as it is convenient, preferablybefore the gauge reaches E. There willbe a small reserve of fuel in the tankwhen the fuel gauge needle reaches E.

SII0110

SII0402


2-5

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

The indicates that the fuel filler lid islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

O If the vehicle runs out of fuel, themalfunction indicator lamp

(MIL) may come on. Refuel assoon as possible. After a few driv-ing trips, the lamp shouldturn off. If the lamp remains on af-ter a few driving trips, have the ve-hicle inspected by an authorizedINFINITI retailer.

O For additional information, see“Malfunction indicator lamp(MIL)” later in this section.

COMPASS AND OUTSIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAYThis unit is a display unit with the followingfunctions:

O Function to measure terrestrial magnetismand indicate heading direction of vehicle

O Function to indicate outside air tempera-ture

O Function to indicate caution for frozen roadsurfaces

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DIS-PLAY

Push the switch when the ignition key is in theACC or ON position. The outside temperaturewill be displayed in °F .

O Push the switch to change from °F to °C.

O If the outside temperature drops below thefreezing point, the display indicates ICE.

O When the outside temperature is be-tween 130°F (55°C) and 158°FSII0112

SII0113


2-6

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

(70°C), the display shows 130°F(55°C).

O When the outside temperature islower than −20°F (−30°C) or higherthan 158°F (70°C), the display showsonly - - - though it is operating. Thisis not a malfunction.

O The outside temperature sensor is lo-cated in front of the radiator. Thesensor may be affected by road or en-gine heat, wind direction and otherdriving conditions. The display maydiffer from the actual outside tem-perature or the temperature dis-played on various signs or bill-boards.

CAUTION

Use the ICE indication for referenceonly. Confirm the traffic information

and road conditions to drive safely.

COMPASS DISPLAY

Push the switch when the ignition key is in theACC or ON position. The direction will bedisplayed.

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north andgeographical north is known as variance. Insome areas, this difference can sometimes begreat enough to cause false compass read-ings. Follow these instructions to set thevariance for your particular location if thishappens:

1. Establish your location on the zone map.Record your zone number.

2. Push the ON/OFF switch in for five sec-onds until the current zone entry number isdisplayed.

3. Press the ON/OFF switch repeatedly untilthe new zone entry number is displayed.

Once the desired zone number is displayed,stop pressing the ON/OFF switch and thedisplay will show compass direction within afew seconds.


2-7

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O If a magnet is located near the com-pass or the vehicle is driven wherethe terrestrial magnetism is dis-turbed, the compass display may notindicate the correct direction.

O In places where the terrestrial mag-netism is disturbed, the correction ofthe direction starts automatically,extinguishing the direction bar. Ifturn is made one or two times, thecorrection is complete and the direc-tion bar comes back on.

Correction functions of the com-pass displayThe compass display is equipped with auto-matic correction function. If the direction isnot shown correctly, carry out the manualcorrection procedure set out below.

Manual correction procedure1. Push the switch for about 10 seconds. The

direction bar starts blinking.SII0114


2-8

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

2. Drive the vehicle slowly in an open andsafe area. The initial correction is com-pleted while turning in one or two turns.

CAUTION

In places where the earth’s magne-tism is disturbed, the initial correc-tion procedure may start automati-cally.


2-9

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Anti-lock brake warninglight Low fuel warning light 4WD shift indicator light

Automatic transmission oil temperaturewarning light Low washer fluid warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic transmission park warninglight Seat belt warning light Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Overdrive off indicator light

Charge warning light Cruise main switch indicator light(Green) Transfer 4LO position indicator light

Door open warning lightIntelligent cruise control systemON/OFF switch indicator light (Green; ifso equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light Intelligent cruise control system warninglight (Orange; if so equipped)

4WD warning light Cruise set switch indicator light

CHECKING BULBS

Turn the ignition key to ON without startingthe engine. The following lights will come on:

, , or , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then

go off:, or , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate aburned-out bulb or an open circuit in theelectrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock brakewarning light

The light should turn off within 1 second afterturning the ignition switch to ON. If not, thesystem is malfunctioning.


2-10

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate the anti-lock brakesystem is not functioning properly. In eithercase, have the system checked by yourINFINITI dealer.

If an abnormality occurs in the system, theanti-lock function will cease but the ordinarybrakes will continue to operate normally.

If the light comes on while you are driv-ing, contact your INFINITI retailer for re-pair.

Automatic transmission oiltemperature warning light(if so equipped)

This light comes on when the automatictransmission oil temperature is too high. If thelight comes on while driving, reduce thevehicle speed as soon as safely possible untilthe light turns off.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation whenthe A/T oil temperature warning lightis on may damage the automatictransmission.

Automatic transmissionpark warning light (if soequipped)

This light indicates that the automatic trans-mission parking function is not engaged. If thetransfer control is not secured in any driveposition while the automatic transmissionselector lever is in the P position, the trans-mission will disengage and the wheel will notlock.

The warning light may come on when theignition switch is ON and the automatic

transmission lever is shifted to the P positionwhile shifting the 4WD shift switch between4H and 4L.

Shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2H, AUTO,4H or 4LO position again when the warninglight comes on, and make sure the 4WD shiftindicator light is ON.

See “Parking” in the “5. Starting and driving”section.

WARNING

O If the ATP light is ON, this indi-cates that the automatic transmis-sion P (Park) position will notfunction and the transfer case is inneutral.

O When parking, always make surethat the 4WD shift indicator lightis on and the parking brake is


2-11

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

set before you stop the engine.Failure to engage the transfercase in 2H, AUTO, 4H or 4LOcould result in the vehicle movingunexpectedly, resulting in seri-ous personal injury or propertydamage.

or Brake warninglight

This light functions for both the parking brakeand the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator :

The light comes on when the parking brake isapplied.

Low brake fluid warning light :

When the ignition key is in the ON positionthe light warns of a low brake fluid level. If thelight comes on while the engine is running

with the parking brake not applied, stop thevehicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “8.Do-it-yourself” section.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by your INFINITIretailer.

WARNING

O Your brake system may not beworking properly if the warninglight is on. Driving could be dan-gerous. If you judge it to be safe,drive carefully to the nearest ser-vice station for repairs. Other-wise, have your vehicle towed.

O Pressing the brake pedal with theengine stopped and/or low brake

fluid level may increase yourstopping distance and brakingwill require greater pedal effortas well as greater pedal travel.

O If the brake fluid level is belowthe MIN mark on the brake fluidreservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checkedat an INFINITI retailer.

Charge warning lightIf the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate the charging systemis not functioning properly. Turn the engineoff and check the alternator belt. If the belt isloose, broken, missing or if the light remainson, see your INFINITI retailer immediately.


2-12

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the belt isloose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors orrear window are not closed securely while theignition key is ON.

Engine oil pressure warn-ing light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. Ifthe light flickers or comes on during normaldriving, pull off the road in a safe area, stopthe engine immediately and call an INFINITIretailer or other authorized repair shop.

The oil pressure warning light is not de-signed to indicate a low oil level. Usethe dipstick to check the oil level. See

“Engine oil” in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the oil pres-sure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almostimmediately. Turn off the engine assoon as it is safe to do so.

4WD warning light (if soequipped)

The four wheel drive warning light comes onwhen the key switch is turned to ON. It turnsoff soon after the engine is started.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioningproperly, the warning light will either remainilluminated or blink. See “4WD warning light”in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

CAUTION

O If the warning light comes on orblinks during operation, have yourvehicle checked by an authorizedINFINITI retailer as soon as pos-sible.

O Do not drive on dry hard surfaceroads in the 4H or 4LO position. Ifthe 4WD warning light turns onwhen you are driving on dry hardsurface roads

O in the AUTO or 4H position,shift the 4WD shift switch to2WD.

O in the 4LO position, stop thevehicle, move the automatictransmission lever to the Nposition, and shift the 4WD


2-13

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

shift switch to 2WD and the auto-matic transmission lever to the Dposition.

If the warning light is still on afterthe above operation, have your ve-hicle checked by an authorizedINFINITI retailer as soon as pos-sible.

Low fuel warning lightThis light comes on when the fuel in the tankis getting low. Refuel as soon as it isconvenient, preferably before the fuel gaugereaches E.

There will be a small reserve of fuel re-maining in the tank when the fuel gaugeneedle reaches E.

Low washer fluid warninglight

This light comes on when the washer tankfluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid asnecessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the“8. Do-it-yourself” section.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten seatbelts. The light illuminates whenever theignition key is turned to ON, and will remainilluminated until the driver’s seat belt isfastened. At the same time, the chime willsound for about six seconds unless thedriver’s seat belt is securely fastened.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “1. Seats, restraintsand supplemental air bag systems” section forprecautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bagwarning light

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag light willilluminate. The supplemental air bag warninglight will turn off after about 7 seconds if thesupplemental front air bag and supplementalside air bag systems and pre-tensioner seatbelt are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental air bag and pre-tensioner seatbelt needs servicing and your INFINITI mustbe taken to your nearest authorized INFINITIretailer.

O The supplemental air bag warning lightremains on after approximately 7 seconds.

O The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

O The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.


2-14

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemen-tal restraint system and/or the pre-tensionerseat belt may not function properly.

For additional information, see “Supplementalrestraint system” in the “1. Seats, restraintsand supplemental air bag” section.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warninglight is on, it could mean that thesupplemental front air bag system,supplemental side air bag systemand/or the pre-tensioner seat beltwill not operate in an accident.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Cruise main switch indica-tor light (Green)

The light comes on when the main switch isturned ON.

Intelligent cruise controlsystem ON/OFF switchindicator light (Green; ifso equipped)

The light comes on when the ICC systemON/OFF switch is pushed. The light goes outwhen the ON/OFF switch is pushed again.While the ON/OFF switch indicator lightcomes on, the ICC system is operational.

Intelligent cruise controlsystem warning light (Or-ange)

The light comes on if there is a malfunction inthe intelligent cruise control system.

Cruise set switch indica-tor light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If thelight flickers while the engine is running, itmay indicate the cruise control system is notfunctioning properly. Have the system

checked by your INFINITI retailer.

4WD shift indicator light(if so equipped)

The light should turn off within 1 second afterturning the ignition switch to ON.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shiftindicator light will illuminate the positionselected by the 4WD shift switch.

The 4WD shift indicator light may blinkwhile shifting from one drive mode tothe other.

High beam indicator light(Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight highbeam is on and goes out when the low beamis selected.

Malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL)

If the Malfunction indicator lamp comes on


2-15

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

steady or blinks while the engine is running,it may indicate a potential emission controlmalfunction.

The Malfunction indicator lamp may alsocome on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose ormissing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel.Check to make sure the fuel filler cap isinstalled and closed tightly, and that thevehicle has at least 3 US gallons (14 liters) offuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the lampshould turn off if no other potential emissioncontrol system malfunction exists.

Operation

The Malfunction indicator lamp will come onin one of two ways:

O Malfunction indicator lamp on steady —An emission control system malfunctionhas been detected. Check the fuel fillercap. If the fuel filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. Thelamp should turn off after a few

driving trips. If the lamp does notturn off after a few driving trips, have thevehicle inspected by an authorizedINFINITI retailer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

O Malfunction indicator lamp blinking — Anengine misfire has been detected whichmay damage the emission control system.To reduce or avoid emission control sys-tem damage:

* do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

* avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.* avoid steep uphill grades.* if possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stopblinking and come on steady.

Have the vehicle inspected by an autho-

rized INFINITI retailer. You do not need tohave your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation withouthaving the emission control systemchecked and repaired as necessarycould lead to poor driveability, re-duced fuel economy, and possibledamage to the emission controlsystem.

Overdrive off indicatorlight

This light comes on during driving when theoverdrive switch is pressed to prevent over-drive operation.

The O/D OFF indicator light comes on for twoseconds each time the ignition key is turned


2-16

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

ON. This shows the light is functioningproperly.

If the O/D OFF indicator light blinks for approxi-mately 8 seconds after coming on for 2 seconds,have your INFINITI retailer check the transmis-sion and repair it if necessary.

The automatic transmission is equipped withan electronic Fail-Safe mode. This systemallows the vehicle to be driven even in theevent of damage to the electrical circuits. Ifthis occurs, the gears automatically engageand lock into 3rd gear.

See the “Driving the vehicle” in the “5.Starting and driving” section for fail-safe before visiting your INFINITI re-tailer.

Transfer 4LO position indi-cator light (if so equipped)


This light comes on when the 4WD shiftswitch is set in the 4LO position with ignitionkey in the ON position.

If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LOposition and the light blinks, stop the vehicle,drive slowly forward and the light will turn on.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop thevehicle, move the automatic transmissionselector lever to the N position, and push the4WD shift switch and move it in 4LO or 4H.

The transfer case may be damaged if you shiftthe switch while driving.

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shiftswitch between 4H and 4LO unless you havefirst stopped the vehicle and moved theautomatic transmission shift lever to neutral.Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicatorlight turns on when you shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 4LO.

The indicator light may blink while shift-ing from one drive mode to the other.

Turn signal/hazard indica-tor lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switchlever or hazard switch is turned on.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warningThe disc brake pads have audible wear warn-ings. When a brake pad requires replacement,it will make a high pitched scraping soundwhen the vehicle is in motion whether or notthe brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the warningsound is heard when the vehicle is moving,whether or not the brake pedal is depressed.

Key reminder chimeThe chime will sound if the driver side door isopened while the key is left in the ignitionswitch. Remove the key and take it with youwhen leaving the vehicle.


2-17

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Light reminder chimeThe chime will sound when the driver’s sidedoor is opened with the headlight switch onunless the ignition key is in the ON position.

Make sure to turn the light switch off whenyou leave the vehicle.

SECURITY SYSTEMSYour vehicle has two types of security system,as follows:

O Vehicle security system

O Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by thesecurity indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMThe vehicle security system provides visualand audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicleare disturbed.

Security indicator light

How to activate the vehicle se-curity system1. Close all windows.

The system can be activated even if thewindows are open.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close and lock all doors, hood, back doorand back door glass hatch. All doors canbe locked either with the multi-remotecontroller, a key, the door lock knob or thelock-unlock switch. See “Doors” in the “3.Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-tion for locking all doors simultaneously.

4. Confirm that the security indicator lightcomes on. The security light glows forabout 30 seconds and then begins to flash.The system is now activated. If, during this30 second time period, the door is un-locked by the key or keyfob, or the ignitionkey is turned to ACC or ON, the system willnot activate.

SII0293


2-18

Z 02.9.12/JR50-D X

O Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the systemwill activate with all doors, hood,back door and back door glass hatchlocked and ignition key off. Turn theignition key to ACC to turn the systemoff.

Vehicle security system opera-tionThe vehicle security system will give thefollowing alarm:

O The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

O The alarm automatically turns off after 1minute; however, the alarm will reactivate ifthe vehicle is tampered with again.

The alarm is activated by:

O Unlocking the door or back door withoutusing the key or keyfob. (Even if the dooris opened by releasing the door inside lockknob, the alarm is activated.)

O Opening the hood.(Even if the hood is opened by the hoodrelease handle, the alarm is activated.)

O Opening the back door glass hatch(Even if the back door glass hatch isopened by the opener switch, the alarm isactivated.)

O Connecting the battery connector after ithas been disconnected from the battery formore than 1 second.

How to stop alarmThe alarm will stop only by unlocking a dooror back door with the key or keyfob. The alarmwill not stop if the ignition switch is turned toACC or ON.

If the system does not operate as de-scribed above, have it checked by yourINFINITI retailer.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBI-LIZER SYSTEMThe Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System willnot allow the engine to start without the use ofthe registered Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem key.

If the engine fails to start using the registeredInfiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System key (forexample, when interference is caused byanother Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkey, an automated toll road device or auto-mated payment device on the key ring), restartthe engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF orLOCK position, and wait approximately 5seconds.


2-19

Z 02.9.12/JR50-D X

3. Repeat step 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered Infiniti VehicleImmobilizer System key.

If this procedure allows the engine to start,INFINITI recommends placing the registeredInfinit Vehicle Immobilizer System key on aseparate key ring to avoid interference fromother devices.

Statement related to section 15 of FCCrules for Infiniti Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem(CONT ASSY - IMMOBILIZER, ANT ASSY- IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANU-FACTURE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OP-ERATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignition switchis in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. Thisfunction indicates the security systemsequipped on the vehicle are operational.

If the Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System ismalfunctioning, this light will remain on whilethe ignition key is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see your INFINITI re-tailer for Infiniti Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem service as soon as possible.Please bring all Infiniti Vehicle Immobi-lizer System keys that you have whenvisiting your INFINITI retailer for ser-vice.

SII0293


2-20

Z 02.9.12/JR50-D X

WINDSHIELD WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH

The windshield wiper and washer operateswhen the ignition key is in the ACC or ONposition.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper.

Intermittent operation speed can be adjustedby turning the knob.

Pull the lever toward you to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate severaltimes.

CAUTION

The following could damage thewasher system:O Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 30 sec-onds.

O Do not operate the washer if thereservoir tank is empty.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washersolution may freeze on the wind-shield and obscure your vision whichmay lead to an accident. Warm thewindshield with the defroster beforeyou wash the windshield.

REAR WINDOW WIPERAND WASHER SWITCH

The rear window wiper and washer operateswhen the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Turn the switch clockwise to the intermittent,low speed, position to operate the wiperor washer.

Turn the switch counterclockwise to theposition to operate the washer. Then

the wiper will also operate several times.

SII0238B SII0239A


2-21

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CAUTION

O Do not operate the washer con-tinuously for more than 30 sec-onds.

O Do not operate the washer if res-ervoir tank is empty.

O The rear window wiper will not oper-ate when the glass hatch is open.

The rear window wiper will not oper-ate if the glass hatch is closed withthe wiper switch on. To operate thewindow wiper, turn the switch to offand then to on.

O The glass hatch will not open whilethe rear window wiper is operating.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washersolution may freeze on the glasshatch and obscure your vision whichmay lead to an accident. Warm theglass hatch with the defroster beforeyou wash the glass hatch.

GLASS HATCH AND OUT-SIDE MIRROR DEFOGGERSWITCH

SII0294


2-22

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

To defog the glass hatch and the outside doormirrors, start the engine and push the switchon. (The indicator light will come on.) Pushthe switch again to turn the defogger off.

It will automatically turn off in approximately15 minutes. If the window clears before thistime, push the switch off manually.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of thewindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the glass hatch defogger.

HEADLIGHT AND TURNSIGNAL SWITCH

XENON HEADLIGHTS

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

O When xenon headlights are on,they produce a high voltage. Toprevent an electric shock, neverattempt to modify or disassemble.Always have your xenon head-

lights replaced at an authorizedINFINITI retailer.

O Xenon headlights provide consid-erably more light than conven-tional headlights. If they are notcorrectly aimed, they might tem-porarily blind an oncoming driveror the driver ahead of you andcause a serious accident. If head-lights are not aimed correctly,immediately take your vehicle toan authorized INFINITI retailerand have the headlights adjustedcorrectly.

When the xenon headlight is initially turnedon, its brightness or color varies slightly.However, the color and brightness will soonstabilize.

O The life of xenon headlights will beshortened by frequent on-off opera-

SII0308


2-23

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

tion. It is generally desirable not toturn off the headlights for short inter-vals, (for example, when the vehiclestops at a traffic signal). Even whenthe daytime running lights are active(Canada only), the xenon headlightsdo not turn on. This way the life of thexenon headlights is not reduced.

O If the xenon headlight bulb is close toburning out, the brightness will dras-tically decrease, the light will startblinking, or the color of the light willbecome reddish. If one or more of theabove signs appear, contact anINFINITI retailer.

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

Turn the switch to the AUTO position:

When the ignition key is in the ON position,the tail light, headlight, instrument light andother lights turn on automatically, dependingon the brightness of the surroundings. Theheadlight will automatically turn off 5 minutesafter the ignition switch has been turned to theOFF position and the driver’s or front passen-ger’s door is opened.

The headlight will also automatically turn off45 seconds after a front door is opened andclosed.

When the light switch is turned to theposition, the headlight low or high

beam will turn off.

Turn the switch to the position:

The front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument lights will come on.

Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the otherlights remain on.

SII0079


2-24

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Be sure not to put anything on top of thephoto sensor located on the top right-hand side of the instrument panel. Thephoto sensor controls the autolight; if itis covered, the photo sensor reacts as ifit is dark and the headlights will illumi-nate.

Battery saver systemO When the headlight switch is in the

or position while the ignitionkey is in the ON position, the lightsincluding the front fog light will automati-

cally turn off 5 minutes after the ignitionswitch has been turned to the OFF posi-tion.

O When the headlight switch remains in theor position after the lights

automatically turn off, the lights will turnon when the headlight switch is turned tothe OFF position and turn to the or

position.

CAUTION

O When you turn on the headlightswitch again after the lights auto-matically turns off, the lights willnot turn off automatically. Be sureto turn the light switch to the OFFposition when you leave the ve-hicle for extended periods of time,otherwise the battery will go dead.

O Never leave the light switch onwhen the engine is not running forextended periods of time.

Headlight aiming control

Depending on the number of occupants in thevehicle and the load it is carrying, the head-light axis may be higher than desired. If thevehicle is traveling on a hilly road, theheadlights may directly hit the rearview mirrorof the vehicle ahead or the windshield of the

SII0082A

SII0306


2-25

Z 02.9.12/JR50-D X

oncoming vehicle. The light axis can belowered with the operation of the switch.

The larger the number designated on theswitch, the lower the axis.

When traveling with no heavy load or on a flatroad, select position 0.

Xenon headlights are extremely brightcompared to conventional headlights. Ifthe xenon headlights hit the rearviewmirror of the vehicle ahead or the wind-shield of the oncoming vehicle, thedriver of these vehicles may have diffi-culty driving because of the brightness.Use the headlight aiming control switchto lower the light axis. See “Headlightand turn signal switch” earlier in thissection for information on xenon head-lights.

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control operateswhen the head light switch is in the or

position.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness ofthe instrument panel lights.

When the control is turned upward until aclick sound is heard, the light intensity will beat maximum. When the control is turneddownward until a click sound is heard or felt,the light will be turned off.

Headlight beam select

To select the high beam, push the leverforward. Pull it back to select the low beam.

Passing signalPulling the lever toward you will flash theheadlight high beam.

SII0085 SII0080


2-26

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Daytime running light system(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at areduced intensity when the engine is startedwith the parking brake released. The daytimerunning lights operate with the headlightswitch in the OFF position or in the po-sition. Turn the headlight switch to the

position for full illumination when driv-ing at night.

If the parking brake is applied before theengine is started, the daytime running lightsdo not illuminate. The daytime running lightsilluminate once the parking brake is released.The daytime running lights will remain onuntil the ignition switch is turned off.

WARNING

When the daytime running light sys-

tem is active, tail lights on yourvehicle are not on. It is necessary atdusk to turn on your headlights.Failure to do so could cause anaccident injuring yourself and oth-ers.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is completed,

the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever upor down to the point where lights beginflashing.

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlightswitch to the position, then turn theswitch to the position. To turn them off,turn the switch to the OFF position.

SII0083

SII0129


2-27

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

The headlights must be on for the fog lights tooperate.

HAZARD WARNINGFLASHER SWITCH

The switch is located on the instrument panel.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergencyconditions. All turn signal lights will flash.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

WARNING

O If stopping for an emergency, besure to move the vehicle well offthe road.

O Do not use the hazard warningflashers while moving on thehighway unless unusual circum-stances force you to drive soslowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

O Turn signals do not work whenthe hazard warning flasher lightsare on.

The flasher can be actuated with the ignitionswitch either off or on.

HORN

To sound the horn, push the center pad areaof the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doingso could affect proper operation ofthe supplemental front air bag sys-tem. Tampering with the supplemen-tal front air bag system may result in

SII0295

SII0175


2-28

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

serious personal injury.

HEATED SEATS (if soequipped)

The seats are warmed by built-in heaters. Theswitches located on the center console and therear side of the console box can be operatedindependently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the (Low) or (High)position of the switch, as desired, depend-ing on the temperature. The indicator lightin the switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as longas the switch is on.

3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed orbefore you leave the vehicle, be sure toturn the switch off.

For no heat, the switch has a center OFFposition between low and high.

CAUTION

O Do not use the seat heater for ex-tended periods or when no one isusing the seat.

O Do not put anything on the seatwhich insulates heat, such as ablanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.Otherwise, the seat may becomeoverheated.

O Do not place anything hard orheavy on the seat or pierce it with

SII0296

SII0307


2-29

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

a pin or similar object. This mayresult in damage to the heater.

O Any liquid spilled on the heatingseat should be removed immedi-ately with a dry cloth.

O When cleaning the seat, neveruse gasoline, thinner, or anysimilar materials.

O If any abnormalities are found orthe heating seat does not oper-ate, turn the switch off and havethe system checked by yourINFINITI retailer.

O The battery could run down if theheater is operated while the en-gine is not running.

CLOCKIf the power supply is disconnected, theclock will not indicate the correct time.Readjust the time.

ADJUSTING THE TIMETo adjust the time, turn the adjusting knob.

POWER OUTLET

SII0305

SII0297


2-30

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CAUTION

O Use caution as the socket and plugmay be hot during or immediatelyafter use.

O This power outlet is not designedfor use with a cigarette lighterunit.

O Do not use with accessories thatexceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A)power draw. Do not use doubleadapters or more than one elec-trical accessory.

O Use this power outlet with theengine running. (If the engine isstopped, this could result in adischarged battery.)

O Avoid using when the air condi-tioner, headlights or rear window

defogger is on.

O When not in use, be sure to closethe cap. Do not allow water tocontact the socket.

O Before inserting or disconnectinga plug, be sure to turn off thepower switch of electrical acces-sory being used or the ACC powerof the vehicle.

O Push the plug in as far as it willgo. If good contact is not made,the plug may overheat or the in-ternal temperature fuse mayblow.

CIGARETTE LIGHTER ANDASHTRAYThe cigarette lighter operates when the igni-tion switch is in ACC or ON.

Push the lighter in all the way, then release it.When the lighter is heated, it will spring out.

Return the lighter to its original position afteruse.

WARNING

The cigarette lighter should not beused while driving so full attentionmay be given to vehicle operation.

SII0165


2-31

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CAUTION

The cigarette lighter socket is apower source for the cigarette lighterelement only. The use of the ciga-rette lighter socket as a power sourcefor any other accessory is not recom-mended.

STORAGETRAY

COIN BOX (if so equipped)

To open the box, lightly push it once anddraw it out.

WARNING

The storage tray should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

Do not use the box as an ashtray.

Do not place valuable items in the tray.

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

The sunglasses holder can be opened bypushing the button.

WARNING

The sunglasses holder should not beused while driving so full attentionmay be given to vehicle operation.

SII0298

SII0359

SII0134


2-32

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CAUTION

O Do not use for anything other thanglasses.

O Do not leave glasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking indirect sunlight. The heat maydamage the glasses.

CUP HOLDERS

The front cup holder in front of the centerconsole box has an insert that can be removedfor larger cups.

Use the insert for the front cup holder so thatits upper surface is flush with that of theinsert.

SII0316

SII0300


2-33

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WARNING

The cup holder should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

CAUTION

O Avoid abrupt starting and brakingwhen the cup holder is being usedto prevent spilling the drink. If theliquid is hot, it can scald you oryour passenger.

O Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injureyou in an accident.

GLOVE BOX

When locking or unlocking the glove box, usethe master key.The glove box may be opened by pulling thehandle.

WARNING

Keep the glove box lid closed whiledriving to help prevent injury in an ac-cident or a sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

WARNING

O The center console box should notbe used while driving so full atten-tion may be given to vehicle op-eration.

O Keep the center console box lidclosed while driving to preventinjury in an accident or suddenstop.

Do not place valuable items in the cen-ter console box.

SII0301


2-34

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

LUGGAGE STORAGE

WARNING

Keep luggage side console box lidsclosed securely while driving to pre-vent injury in an accident or suddenstop.

Do not place valuable items in the lug-gage side console box.

SII0403 SII0136


2-35

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WARNING

O Make sure the luggage boardcloses securely.

O Do not drive with the board re-moved.


O Never allow anyone to ride in theluggage area or on the rear seatwhen it is in the fold-down posi-tion.

O It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside of a ve-hicle. In a collision, people riding

in these areas are more likely tobe seriously injured or killed.

O Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

The luggage hooks can be used to securecargo with ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING

O Properly secure all cargo to helpprevent it from sliding or shifting.Do not place cargo higher than theseatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

SII0137


2-36

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O Use suitable ropes and hooks tosecure cargo.

O Never allow anyone to ride in theluggage area. It is extremely dan-gerous to ride in a cargo areainside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously in-jured or killed.


O Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

Side finisher

O When hooking on ropes, do not applya load of more than 22 lb (98 N) to asingle hook.

O Do not use the luggage net betweenthe A and B hooks.

Floor hooks

SIP0174 SIP0175


2-37

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CARGO NETThe cargo net keeps packages in the cargoarea from moving around while your vehicle isdriven.

To install the cargo net, attach the four hooksto the four retainers.

To remove the cargo net, detach the fourhooks from the cargo net retainers.

WARNING


O Be sure to secure all four hooksinto the retainers. The cargo re-strained in the net must not ex-ceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or the netmay not stay secured.

TONNEAU COVER

The tonneau cover keeps the luggage com-partment contents hidden from the outside.

To open the tonneau cover, pull it out andhang both sides on the hooks. To close thetonneau cover, remove it from the hooks andrelease it.

SIP0173A

SII0138


2-38

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WARNING

O Never put anything on the tonneaucover, no matter how small. Anyobject on it could cause an injuryin an accident or sudden stop.

O Do not leave the tonneau cover inthe vehicle with it disengagedfrom the holder.


O The child restraint top tether strapmay be damaged by contact withthe tonneau cover or items in thecargo area. Remove the tonneau

cover from the vehicle or secure itand any cargo. Your child couldbe seriously injured or killed in acollision if the top tether strap isdamaged.


2-39

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

LUGGAGE RACK (if soequipped)

The cross-bars can be adjusted forward andbackward. Place your luggage between thebars (A), adjust the bars (A), and secure theluggage with rope to the bars (A). There arealso adjustable loops on the side bars for therope attachment.

Always evenly distribute the luggage on theluggage rack. Do not load more than 100lbs. (45 kg). Be careful that your vehicledoes not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR front and rear). The GVWR andGAWR are located on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label (located on the driver’sdoor pillar). For more information regardingGVWR and GAWR, refer to “10. Technical andcustomer information”.

Ensure both front and rear bars (A) areinstalled correctly. See illustration fordetails.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removingitems from the luggage rack. If youcannot comfortably lift the items ontothe luggage rack from the ground,use a ladder or stool.

WINDOWS

WARNING

O Make sure that all passengershave their hands, etc. inside thevehicle while it is in motion andbefore closing the windows.

O Do not leave children unattendedinside the vehicle. They couldunknowingly activate switches or

SII0315


2-40

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

controls and become trapped in awindow. Unattended childrencould become involved in seriousaccidents.

POWER WINDOWSThe power windows operate when the ignitionkey is in the ON position.

To open or close the window, push down orpull up the switch and hold it. The main

switch (driver side switches) will open orclose all the windows.

The power windows are operational for about45 seconds, even after the ignition key isturned to the OFF position. If the driver’s orfront passenger’s door is opened during thisperiod of about 45 seconds, power to thewindows is canceled.

The passenger side switch will open or closeonly the corresponding window. To open orclose the window, hold the switch down or up.

Locking passenger’s windowsWhen the lock button is pushed in, only thedriver side window can be opened or closed.Push it in again to cancel.

SII0388SII0389

SII0198A


2-41

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Automatic operation

To fully open or close the front windows,completely press down or up the switch andrelease it; it need not be held. The window willautomatically open or close all the way. Tostop the window, just pull up or down theswitch toward the close or open side.

A light press on the switch will cause thewindow to open or close until the switch isreleased.

Auto reverse function (For frontwindows)

If the control unit detects something caught inthe front window as it moves up, the windowwill be immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be activatedwhen the front window is closed by automaticoperation when the ignition key is in the ONposition or for about 45 seconds after theignition key is turned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driv-ing conditions, the auto reverse functionmay be activated if an impact or loadsimilar to something being caught in thewindow occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances im-mediately before the closed position

which cannot be detected. Makesure that all passengers have theirhands, etc., inside the vehicle be-fore closing the window.

SUNROOF (if so equipped)ELECTRIC SUNROOFThe sun roof will only operate when theignition key is in the ON position.

The automatic sunroof is operational for about45 seconds, even after the ignition key isturned to the OFF position. If the driver’s orfront passenger’s door is opened during thisperiod of about 45 seconds, power to thesunroof is canceled.

SII0390


2-42

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Sliding the sunroof

To open the roof, press the switch to theside.

To close the roof, press the switch to theside.

The roof will automatically open or close allthe way. To stop the roof, just press theswitch toward either side.

Auto reverse function (Whenclosing the sunroof)

If the control unit detects something caught inthe sunroof as it moves to the front, thesunroof will immediately open backward.

The auto reverse function can be activatedwhen the sunroof is closed by automaticoperation when the ignition key is in the ONposition or for about 45 seconds after theignition key is turned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driv-ing conditions, the auto reverse functionmay be activated if an impact or loadsimilar to something being caught in thesunroof occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances im-mediately before the closed position

which cannot be detected. Makesure that all passengers have theirhands, etc., inside the vehicle be-fore closing the sunroof.

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then pressthe side of the tilt switch.

To tilt down the sunroof, press the side.

Sun shade

Open/close the sun shade by sliding itbackward/forward.

The shade will open automatically when thesunroof is opened. However, it must beclosed manually.

SII0386


2-43

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Restarting the sunroof switchThe switch may become inoperable after thebattery terminal is disconnected, the electricalsupply interrupted and/or some abnormalitydetected.

Use the following re-set procedure to returnsunroof operation to normal.

1. If the sunroof lid is open, push the tiltingswitch toward tilt DOWN (or the slidingswitch toward close) repeatedly to fullyclose the lid.

2. After the lid has closed all the way, keeppushing the tilting switch toward tiltDOWN (or the sliding switch toward close)for more than 1 second.

WARNING

O In an accident you could be thrownfrom the vehicle through an opensunroof. Always use seat belts andchild restraints.

O Do not allow anyone to stand upor extend any portion of theirbody out of the opening while thevehicle is in motion or while thesunroof is closing.

CAUTION

O Remove water drops, snow, ice orsand from the sunroof beforeopening.

O Do not place any heavy object onthe sunroof or surrounding area.

SII0145


2-44

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

If the sunroof does not closeHave your INFINITI retailer check and repairthe sunroof.

INTERIOR LIGHTS (if soequipped)

The interior lights have a three positionswitch.

When the switch is in the center j position,the lights will illuminate when a door isopened.

The ceiling light will stay on for about 30seconds when:

O The driver’s door is unlocked by thekeyfob, a key or power door lock switchwhen all doors are locked.

O The driver’s door is opened and thenclosed without the key in the ignitionswitch.

O The key is removed from the ignitionswitch while all doors are closed.

The ceiling light will turn off while the 30second timer is activated when:

O The driver’s door is locked either with thekeyfob, a key, or the power door lockswitch.

SII0147A


2-45

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O The ignition switch is turned ON.

When the interior light switch or the personallight switch is in the ON position, the interior,personal and vanity mirror lights will auto-matically turn off 30 minutes after the ignitionswitch has been turned to the OFF position tosave the battery. To turn on the lights again,insert the key into the ignition switch andmove it to the ON position.

After the above procedure, the interior, per-sonal, or vanity mirror lights will automaticallyturn off 30 minutes after the latest operation ofthe following with the ignition switch in theACC or OFF position:

O Opening or closing any door

O Locking or unlocking any door with thekeyfob, a key or the power door lockswitch.

O Inserting or removing a key from theignition switch

These lights will turn on again when any of theabove operations is performed after the lightshave turned off automatically. (The lights willturn off 30 minutes after the latest operation ofthe above as well.)

CAUTION

O Do not use for extended periods oftime with the engine stopped. Thiscould result in a discharged bat-tery.

O Turn off the interior, personaland vanity mirror lights when youleave the vehicle.

PERSONAL LIGHT

When the interior light switch or the personallight switch is in the ON position, the interior,personal and vanity mirror lights will auto-matically turn off 30 minutes after the ignitionswitch has been turned to the OFF position.To turn on the lights again, insert the key intothe ignition switch and move it to the ONposition.

SII0149


2-46

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CAUTION

O Do not use for extended periods oftime with the engine stopped. Thiscould result in a discharged bat-tery.

O Turn off the interior, personaland vanity mirror lights when youleave the vehicle.

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS

The light on the vanity mirror will turn onwhen the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.

HomeLinkT UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVERThe HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver pro-vides a convenient way to consolidate thefunctions of up to three individual hand-heldtransmitters into one built-in device.

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver powerwill automatically turn off 30 minutes after theignition switch has been turned to the offposition.

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver:

O Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)devices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks andsecurity systems.

O Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the vehi-cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-

nected, HomeLinkT will retain all pro-gramming.

Once the HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver is programmed, retain the origi-nal transmitter for future programmingprocedures (i.e., new vehicle pur-chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, theprogrammed HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. For additional in-formation, refer to “ProgrammingHomeLinkT” later in this section.

SII0148


2-47

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WARNING

O Do not use the HomeLinkT Univer-sal Transceiver with any garagedoor opener that lacks safety stopand reverse features as requiredby federal safety standards.(These standards became effec-tive for opener models manufac-tured after April 1, 1982). A ga-rage door opener which cannot de-tect an object in the path of a clos-ing garage door and then auto-matically stop and reverse, doesnot meet current federal safetystandards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injuryor death.

O During programming, your ga-

rage door or gate may open orclose. Make sure that people andobjects are clear of the garagedoor or gate that you are pro-gramming.

O Your vehicle’s engine should beturned off while programming theHomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver.

PROGRAMMING HomeLinkT

To program your HomeLink Transceiver tooperate a garage door, gate, or entry dooropener, home or office lighting, you need tobe at the same location as the device. Note:Garage door openers (manufactured after1996) have “rolling code protection”. Toprogram a garage door opener equipped with“rolling code protection”; you will need to usea ladder to get up to the garage door opener

motor to be able to access the “smart or learn”program button.

1. To begin, press and hold the 2 outerHomeLinkT buttons (to clear the memory)until the indicator light blinks slowly (after20 seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held trans-mitter 1-3 inches away from theHomeLinkT surface.

SII0395


2-48

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

3. Using both hands, simultaneously pressand hold both the HomeLinkT button youwant to program and the hand-held trans-mitter button.DO NOT release the buttons until step 4has been completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicatorlight on the HomeLinkT flashes, changingfrom a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashingblink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.When the indicator light flashes rapidly,both buttons may be released. The rapidly

flashing light indicates successful pro-gramming. To activate the garage door orother programmed device, press and holdthe programmed HomeLinkT button - re-leasing when the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkTblinks rapidly for two seconds and thenturns solid, HomeLinkT has picked up a“rolling code” garage door opener signal.You will need to proceed with the nextsteps to train the HomeLinkT to completethe programming which may require aladder and another person for conve-nience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn”program button located on the garage dooropener’s motor to activate the “trainingmode”. This button is usually located nearthe antenna wire that hangs down from themotor. If the wire originates from under alight lens, you will need to remove the lensto access the program button.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released theprogram button on the garage dooropener’s motor and the “training light”is lit, you have 30 seconds in which toperform step 7. Use the help of a secondperson for convenience to assist whenperforming this step.

7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pressing andreleasing the garage door opener programbutton, firmly press and release theHomeLinkT button you’ve just pro-grammed. Press and release theHomeLinkT button up to three times tocomplete the training.

8. Your HomeLinkT button should now beprogrammed. (To program the remainingHomeLinkT buttons for additional door orgate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.

NOTE:

Do not repeat step one unless you want

SII0396


2-49

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

to “clear” all previously programmedHomeLinkT buttons).

If you have any questions or are havingdifficulty programming your HomeLinkT but-tons, please refer to the HomeLinkT web siteat: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-662-6200.

PROGRAMMING HomeLinkTFOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERSPrior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations requiredhand-held transmitters to stop transmittingafter 2 seconds. To program your hand-heldtransmitter to HomeLinkT, continue to pressand hold the HomeLinkT button (note steps 2through 4 under “Programming HomeLinkT ”)while you press and re-press (“cycle”) yourhand-held transmitter every 2 seconds untilthe indicator light flashes rapidly (indicatingsuccessful programming).

NOTE:

If programming a garage door opener,

etc., it is advised to unplug the deviceduring the “cycling” process to preventpossible damage to the garage dooropener components.

OPERATING THE HomeLinkTUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver (onceprogrammed) may now be used to activate thegarage door, etc. To operate, simply press theappropriate programmed HomeLinkT Univer-sal Transceiver button. The red indicator lightwill illuminate while the signal is beingtransmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DI-AGNOSISIf the HomeLinkT does not quickly learn thehand-held transmitter information:

O replace the hand-held transmitter batterieswith new batteries.

O position the hand-held transmitter with its

battery area facing away from theHomeLinkT surface.

O press and hold both the HomeLinkT andhand-held transmitter buttons without in-terruption.

O position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5inches (50 to 127 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface. Hold the transmitterin that position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLinkT is not programmed within thattime, try holding the transmitter in anotherposition - keeping the indicator light inview at all times.

If you continue to have programming difficul-ties, please contact the INFINITI ConsumerAffairs Department. The phone numbers arelocated in the Foreword of this Owner’sManual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATIONIndividual buttons cannot be cleared, however


2-50

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

to clear all programming, press and hold thetwo outside buttons and release when theindicator light begins to flash (approximately20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHomeLinkT BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver button, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkTbutton. Do not release the button untilstep 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to127 mm) away from the HomeLinkT sur-face.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitterbutton.

4. The HomeLinkT indicator light will flash,first slowly and then rapidly. When the

indicator light begins to flash rapidly,release both buttons.

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver buttonhas now been reprogrammed. The new devicecan be activated by pushing the HomeLinkTbutton that was just programmed. This pro-cedure will not affect any other programmedHomeLinkT buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLENIf your vehicle is stolen, you should changethe codes of any non-rolling code device thathas been programmed into HomeLinkT. Con-sult the Owner’s Manual of each device or callthe manufacturer or dealer of those devices foradditional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLinkT Uni-versal Transceiver with your new trans-mitter information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part15. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference and (2) Thisdevice must accept any interference thatmay be received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested andcomplies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s au-thority to operate the device.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690


2-51

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

3 PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Keys ............................................................. 3-2Doors ........................................................... 3-3

Locking with key .................................... 3-3Front window operating with key .......... 3-3Locking with inside lock knob ............... 3-4Locking with power door lock switch.... 3-4Child safety rear door lock..................... 3-4

Remote keyless entry system...................... 3-5How to use remote keyless entrysystem.................................................... 3-6Battery replacement................................ 3-9

Hood .......................................................... 3-10Back door .................................................. 3-11

Key operation ....................................... 3-11Glass hatch................................................ 3-12

Opener operation.................................. 3-12

Key operation ....................................... 3-12Fuel filler lid............................................... 3-13

Opener operation.................................. 3-13Fuel filler cap........................................ 3-13

Steering wheel ........................................... 3-15Tilt operation........................................ 3-15

Sun visors.................................................. 3-16Using the sun visors ............................ 3-16

Mirrors....................................................... 3-17Inside mirror ........................................ 3-17Outside mirrors .................................... 3-17

Automatic seat positioner (if soequipped)................................................... 3-18

Automatic seat positioner operation .... 3-18Cancel switch ....................................... 3-20

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using themaster or valet keys which are registered to

the Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System com-ponents in your vehicle. These keys have atransponder chip in the key head. (The walletkey cannot be used to drive your vehicle.)

The master key and wallet key can be used forall locks.

When the key case with the wallet key isplaced into your wallet, be careful not toapply excessive force to the wallet as itor other cards could be damaged.

The valet key cannot be used for the trunk lidor glove box locks.

To protect belongings when you leave a keywith someone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.Record the key number on the key numberplate supplied with your keys and keep it in asafe place (such as your wallet), not in thevehicle. INFINITI does not record any keynumber so it is very important to keep track of

your key number plate.A key number is only necessary when youhave lost all keys and do not have one toduplicate from. If you still have a key, this keycan be duplicated by your INFINITI retailer.Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System KEY -Master and Valet keys:The key number is necessary when you needextra Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System keys.As many as 5 Infiniti Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem keys can be used with one vehicle.New keys must be registered to the InfinitiVehicle Immobilizer System components inyour vehicle by your INFINITI retailer. At thistime, you should bring all Infiniti VehicleImmobilizer System keys that you have to yourINFINITI retailer for registration. This is be-cause the registration process will erase allmemory of the Infiniti Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem components.SIP0233C

PRE-DRIVING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

3-2

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

DOORS

WARNING

O Always have the doors lockedwhile driving. Along with the useof seat belts, this provides greatersafety in the event of an accidentby helping to prevent persons frombeing thrown from the vehicle.This also helps keep children andothers from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keepout intruders.

O Before opening any door, alwayslook for and avoid oncoming traf-fic.

O Do not leave children unattendedinside the vehicle. They couldunknowingly activate switches or

controls. Unattended childrencould become involved in seriousaccidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY

Power

The power door lock system allows you tolock or unlock all doors including the backdoor simultaneously.

O Turning the door key to the front of the

vehicle will lock all doors.

O Turning the door key one time to the rearof the vehicle will unlock the correspond-ing door. From that position, returning thekey to neutral (where the key can only beremoved and inserted) and turning it to therear again within 5 seconds will unlock alldoors.

FRONT WINDOW OPERATINGWITH KEY

Turn the driver’s door key to the unlockposition and hold for about 1 second. Thefront windows will begin to open.

To stop opening, turn the key to the neutralposition.

To close the front windows with the keycylinder, turn the key to the lock position andhold for about 1 second.

To stop closing, turn the key to the neutralposition.

SIP0124


3-3

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOB

Power

Pushing or pulling the front door inside lockknob to the lock or unlock position will lock orunlock the corresponding door.

To lock from the outside without a key, movethe inside lock knob to the LOCK position.Then close the door. When locking the doorthis way, be certain not to leave the key insidethe vehicle.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH

O Operating the power door lock switch willlock or unlock all doors including the backdoor simultaneously.

All door locks will be engaged when the powerdoor lock switch is moved to the LOCKposition with the driver’s or front passenger’sdoor open. Then close the door and all doorswill be locked.

When the power door lock switch is moved to

the LOCK position while either front door isopen and a key is in the ignition switch, alldoors will lock once and then unlock auto-matically.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOORLOCK

Child safety locking helps prevent doors frombeing opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

When the lever is in the lock position,

SIP0125

SIP0318

SIP0126


3-4

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

the rear door can be opened only fromthe outside.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRYSYSTEMIt is possible to lock/unlock all doors andactivate the panic alarm by using the keyfobfrom outside the car.Before locking the doors, make sure thekey is not left in the vehicle.The keyfob can operate at a distance ofapproximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.(The effective distance depends upon theconditions around the vehicle.)As many as four keyfobs can be used with onevehicle. For information concerning the pur-chase and use of additional keyfobs, contactyour INFINITI retailer.

The keyfob will not function when:

O the battery is dead,

O the distance between the vehicle and the

keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate whenthe key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

The following conditions or occur-rences will damage the keyfob.

O Do not allow the keyfob to be-come wet.

O Do not drop the keyfob.

O Do not strike the keyfob sharplyagainst another object.

O Do not place the keyfob for anextended period in an area wheretemperatures exceed 140°F(60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, INFINITIrecommends erasing the ID code of

that keyfob. This will prevent thekeyfob from unauthorized use to un-lock the vehicle. For information re-garding the erasing procedure,please contact an authorizedINFINITI retailer.


3-5

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Setting hazard indicator andhorn mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator andhorn mode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when theLOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicatorflashes twice and the horn chirps once. Whenthe UNLOCK button is pushed, the hazardindicator flashes once.

If hazard indicator and horn mode is notnecessary, you can switch to hazard indicatoronly mode by following the switching proce-dure below.

In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCKbutton is pushed, the hazard indicator flashestwice. When the UNLOCK button is pushed,neither the hazard indicator nor the hornoperates.

SIP0310


3-6

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

(Switching procedure)

Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCKbuttons on the keyfob simultaneously for atleast 2 seconds to switch from one to theother.

When pushing the buttons to set hazardindicator only mode, the hazard indicatorflashes 3 times.

When pushing the buttons to set hazardindicator and horn mode, the hazard indicatorflashes once and the horn chirps once.

(Operations)

Locking doors

1. Remove the ignition key.*1

2. Close all of the doors.*2

3. Push the LOCK button on the keyfob.

4. All of the doors lock.

All of the doors will lock when the LOCK

button on the keyfob is pushed eventhough a door remains open and/or theignition key is in the ON position.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and thehorn chirps once.

When the LOCK button is pushed with alldoors locked, the hazard indicator flashes

SIP0289


3-7

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

twice and the horn chirps once as a reminderthat the doors are already locked.

*1: Doors lock with the keyfob while a key isin the ignition switch. However, the panicalarm will not activate when the ignitionswitch is in the ACC or ON position.

*2: Doors lock with the keyfob while any dooris open. However, hazard and horn chirpmode will not function.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

O Only the driver’s door unlocks

O The hazard indicator flashes once if alldoors are completely closed.

O The interior light turns on and the lighttimer activates for 30 seconds when theswitch is in the center j position.

2. Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfobagain within 5 seconds.

O All doors unlock

O The hazard indicator flashes once if alldoors are completely closed.

The interior light can be turned off withoutwaiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignitionswitch to the ON position or locking the doorswith the keyfob.

Opening the front windowPush the UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

The driver’s door will unlock.

Continue to press the UNLOCK button for 3seconds. The driver’s and front passenger’swindows will be lowered.

Continue to press the UNLOCK button untilwindows are fully open.

To stop lowering the windows, release theUNLOCK button.

To start lowering the windows, press theUNLOCK button again for 3 more seconds.

This function will operate after the ignitionswitch is off and 45 seconds passed or eitherthe front door is opened.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threat-ened, you may activate the panic alarm to callattention as follows:

1. Push the PANIC button on the keyfob forlonger than 0.5 seconds.

2. The panic alarm and headlight will stay onfor 30 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

O It has run for 30 seconds, or

O The LOCK or the UNLOCK button ispressed, or

O The PANIC button is pushed on thekeyfob.


3-8

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

BATTERY REPLACEMENT Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid using a suitable tool.

2. Replace the battery with a new one.Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-lent

Make sure that the ! side faces the bot-tom case.

3. Close the lid securely.

4. Push the keyfob button two or three timesto check its operation.

See your INFINITI retailer if you need anyassistance for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 4above.

O Be careful not to touch a circuit plateand a battery terminal.

O An improperly disposed battery canharm the environment. Always con-

firm local regulations for battery dis-posal.

O The keyfob is water-proof. However,if it does get wet, immediately wipecompletely dry.

O When changing batteries, do not letdust or oil get on the keyfob.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer compli-ance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that may

SIP0311


3-9

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

cause undesired operation of the de-vice.

HOOD

1. Pull the hood lock release handle locatedbelow the instrument panel; the hood willthen spring up slightly.

2. Pull the lever at the front of the hood withyour fingertips and raise the hood.

3. Insert the assist bar into the slot in thefront edge of the hood.

4. When closing the hood, reset the assistbar to its original position, then slowlyclose the hood and make sure it locks intoplace.

WARNING

O Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving.Failure to do so could cause

SIP0270


3-10

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

the hood to fly open and result inan accident.

O If you see steam or smoke comingfrom the engine compartment, toavoid injury do not open the hood.

BACK DOOR

KEY OPERATION

WARNING

Do not drive with the back door open.This could allow dangerous exhaustgases to be drawn into the vehicle.See “Precaution when starting anddriving” in the “5. Starting and driv-ing” section for exhaust gas.

1. Turn the key counterclockwise to unlockthe back door.

Turning the back door key one timecounterclockwise will unlock the backdoor. From that position, returning thekey to neutral (where the key can onlythe removed and inserted) and turning itcounterclockwise again within 5 sec-onds will unlock all doors.

2. Pull the opener handle to open the backdoor.

3. To lock the back door, push it down firmlyand turn the key clockwise.

The power door lock system allows youto lock or unlock all doors including theback door simultaneously.

O Turning the front door key to the frontof the vehicle will lock all doors in-cluding the back door.

O Turning the front door key one time tothe rear of the vehicle will unlock thecorresponding door. From that posi-tion, returning the key to Neutral(where the key can only be removedand inserted) and turning it to therear again within 5 seconds will un-lock all doors.

SIP0268


3-11

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

GLASS HATCH

WARNING

Do not drive with the glass hatchopen. This could allow dangerous ex-haust gases to be drawn into the ve-hicle. See “Precaution when startingand driving” in the “5. Starting anddriving” section for exhaust gas.

OPENER OPERATION

The glass hatch release handle is locatedunder the driver’s arm rest.

To open the glass hatch from the inside, pullthe glass hatch opener handle.

The glass hatch will not open while therear window wiper is operating. Openthe glass hatch after the rear windowwiper returns to the STOP position. Toclose the glass hatch, push the glasshatch down securely.

KEY OPERATION

To open the glass hatch, turn the key fullyclockwise and pull the handle. To close, lowerand push the glass hatch down securely.

Other key operations

O Turning the key clockwise locks all doorsincluding the back door.

O Turning the key counterclockwise unlocksthe back door.

O Turning the key counterclockwise againSIP0244A

SIP0193C

SIP0312


3-12

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

within 5 seconds unlock all doors.

CAUTION

Do not open the glass hatch unlessthe wiper is in the stowed position.

FUEL FILLER LIDOPENER OPERATION

The fuel filler lid release switch is locatedunder the driver’s door arm rest.

To open the fuel filler lid, push the openerswitch. To lock, close the fuel filler lidsecurely.

FUEL FILLER CAP

WARNING

O Gasoline is extremely flammableand highly explosive under certainconditions. You could be burnedor seriously injured if it is misusedor mishandled. Always stop en-gine and do not smoke or allowopen flames or sparks near the ve-hicle when refueling.

O Fuel may be under pressure. Turnthe cap one-half turn, and wait forany hissing sound to stop to pre-SIP0237A


3-13

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

vent fuel from spraying out andpossible personal injury. Then re-move cap.

O Do not attempt to top off the fueltank often the fuel pump nozzleshuts off automatically. Continuedrefueling may cause fuel over-flow, resulting in fuel spray andpossibly a fire.

O Only use an original equipmenttype fuel filler cap as a replace-ment. It has a built-in safety valveneeded for proper operation ofthe fuel system and emissioncontrol system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunc-tion and possible injury or it maycause the MIL to illuminate.

O Never pour fuel into the throttlebody to attempt to start your ve-

hicle.

O Do not fill a portable fuel con-tainer in the vehicle or trailer.Static electricity can cause anexplosion of flammable liquid,vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of se-rious injury or death when fillingportable fuel containers:

— Always place the containeron the ground when filling.

— Do not use electronic deviceswhile filling.

— Keep the pump nozzle in con-tact with the container whileyou are filling it.

— Use only approved portablefuel containers for flammableliquid.

CAUTION

O If fuel is spilled on the car body,flush it away with water to avoidpaint damage.

O Tighten until the fuel filler capclicks. Failure to tighten the fuelfiller cap properly may cause the

malfunction indicator lamp(MIL) to illuminate. If the

lamp illuminates becausethe fuel filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the capand continue to drive the vehicle.The lamp should turn offafter a few driving trips. If the

lamp does not turn off aftera few driving trips, have the ve-hicle inspected by an authorizedINFINITI retailer.


3-14

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O For additional information, see“Malfunction indicator lamp(MIL)” in the “2. Instruments andcontrols” section.

Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder whilerefueling.

The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Re-tighten the cap clockwise until ratchetingclicks are heard.

STEERING WHEEL

TILT OPERATION

Push the lock lever and while holding it down,adjust the steering wheel up or down to thedesired position.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving. You could lose control

SIP0134

SIP0317

SIP0259


3-15

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

of your vehicle and cause anaccident.

SUN VISORS USING THE SUN VISORS1. To block out glare from the front, swing

down the main sun visor.

2. To block glare from the side, remove themain sun visor from the center mount andswing it to the side.

3. Then, to block glare from the front too,swing down the sub-sun visor.

4. To adjust the glare block position, slidethe sub-sun visor to the left.

CAUTION

O Do not store the main sun visor be-fore storing the sub-sun visor.

O Do not pull the sub-sun visor forc-edly downwards.

SIP0171


3-16

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

MIRRORSINSIDE MIRRORThe night position will reduce glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

WARNING

Use the night position only when nec-essary, because it reduces rear viewclarity.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirroron the passenger side are closer thanthey appear. Be careful when movingto the right. Using only this mirrorcould cause an accident. Use insidemirror or glance over your shoulderto properly judge distances to other

objects.

The outside mirror will operate only when theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Turn the control knob to the right or left toselect the right or left outside mirror, thenadjust.

Foldable outside mirrors

Push the outside mirror backward to fold it.

SIP0186

SIP0273

IPD073M


3-17

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

AUTOMATIC SEATPOSITIONER (if so equipped)AUTOMATIC SEAT POSITIONEROPERATIONThis system is designed so that the driver’sseat will automatically move when the auto-matic transmission selector lever is in the P(Park) position. This allows the driver to getinto and out of the driver’s seat more easily.

When one of the following conditions is met,the driver’s seat will slide backward:

O When the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

O When the driver’s door is opened with thekey turned to ACC or LOCK.

O When the key is turned from ON to LOCKwith the driver’s door open.

When one of the following conditions is met,the driver’s seat will return to the positionsbefore being set.

O When the key is inserted into the ignitionswitch.

O When the driver’s door is closed with thekey turned to ACC or LOCK.

O When the key is turned to ON.

Procedure for storing memory

Two positions can be stored in the automaticdrive positioner memory. Follow these pro-cedures to use the memory system.

1. Set the automatic transmission selector

lever to the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desiredpositions by manually operating each ad-justing switch. For additional information,see “Seats” in the “1. Seats, restraints andsupplemental air bag systems” section.

During this step, do not turn the ignition toany positions other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-onds, push the memory switch 1 or 2 fullyfor at least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memoryswitch will come on and stay on forapproximately 5 seconds after pushing theswitch. After the indicator light goes off,the selected positions are stored in theselected memory (1 or 2).

If memory is stored in the same memory

SIR0135


3-18

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

switch, the previous memory will be de-leted.

Confirming memory storageO Turn the ignition ON and push the SET

switch. If the main memory has not beenstored, the indicator light will come on forapproximately 0.5 seconds. When thememory has stored the position, the indi-cator light will stay on for approximately 5seconds.

O If the battery cable is disconnected, or ifthe fuse blows, the memory will be can-celed. In such a case, reset the desiredpositions using the following procedures.

1. Open and close the driver’s door morethan two times with the ignition key in theLOCK position.

2. Reset the desired position using the pre-vious procedure.

Selecting the memorized position

1. Set the automatic transmission selectorlever to the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

3. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for atleast 1 second.

The driver’s seat will move to the memo-rized position with the indicator light flash-ing, and then the light will stay on forapproximately 5 seconds.

When the memory switch 1 or 2 is pushedwith the driver’s door open and then the keyinserted into the ignition switch within ap-proximately 1 minute, the driver’s seat willmove to the memorized position.

System operation

The automatic drive positioner system will notwork or will stop operating under the follow-ing conditions:

O when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7km/h).

O when any two or more of the memoryswitches are simultaneously pushed whilethe automatic drive positioner is operating.

O when the adjusting switch for the driver’sseat is turned on while the automatic drivepositioner is operating.

O when the cancel switch located on theinstrument panel is pushed to cancel.

O when the memory switch 1 or 2 is notpushed for at least 1 second.

O when the seat has been already moved tothe memorized position.

O when no seat position is stored in thememory switch.


3-19

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CANCEL SWITCH

When the CANCEL side of the switch ispushed, the automatic drive positioner systemwill not function.

When the AUTO side of the switch is pushed,the system will function.

SIR0136


3-20

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

4 HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

Ventilators.................................................... 4-2Heater and air conditioner (Automatic)....... 4-3

Automatic operation............................... 4-4Manual operation ................................... 4-5Operating tips......................................... 4-5In-cabin microfilter................................. 4-6

Servicing air conditioner.............................. 4-6Audio system............................................... 4-6

Radio ...................................................... 4-6FM radio reception ................................. 4-7

AM radio reception................................. 4-8Audio operation precautions .................. 4-8FM-AM radio with cassette player ...... 4-10FM-AM radio with cassette player and com-pact disc (CD) player/CD changer ....... 4-16CD care and cleaning ........................... 4-22

Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped) ......................................... 4-23

Antenna ................................................ 4-24Car phone or CB radio .............................. 4-25

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

VENTILATORS

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direc-tion of ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the ventsare closed when the vent switch ismoved to the left.

: This symbol indicates that the ventsare open when the vent switch ismoved to the right.

SIH0075

HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND AUDIO SYSTEMS

4-2

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Automatic)

SIH0078


4-3

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Start the engine and operate the controls toactivate the air conditioner.

WARNING

O The air conditioner cooling func-tion operates only when the en-gine is running.

O Do not leave children or adultswho would normally require thesupport of others alone in yourvehicle. Pets should not be leftalone either. On hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehiclecould quickly become highenough to cause severe or possi-bly fatal injuries to people oranimals.

O Do not use the recirculation modefor long periods as it may causethe interior air to become staleand the windows to fog up.

O Positioning of the heater and airconditioner controls should not bedone while driving so full atten-tion may be given to vehicleoperation.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidifiedheating (AUTO)This mode may be normally used all yearround as the system automatically works tokeep a constant temperature. Air flow distri-bution and fan speed are also controlledautomatically.

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will bedisplayed.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to theright or left to set the desired temperature.

O Adjust the temperature control dial toabout 75°F (24°C) for normal operation.

O The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution and fan speed are alsocontrolled automatically.

Heating (ECON)

The air conditioner does not activate. Whenyou need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Push the ECON (Economy) button on.(ECON will be displayed.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to theright or left to set the desired temperature.

O The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution and fan speed are alsocontrolled automatically.

O Do not set the temperature lower than theoutside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-tem may not work properly.

O Not recommended if windows fog up.


4-4

Z 02.9.12/JR50-D X

Dehumidified defogging

1. Push the DEF button on. (The indi-cator light on the button will come on.)

2. Turn the temperature set button to the rightor left to set the desired temperature.

O To quickly remove ice or fog from theoutside of the windows, push the manualfan control button and set to themaximum position .

O As soon as possible after the windshield isclean, push the AUTO button to return tothe auto mode.

O When the DEF button is pushed, theair conditioner will automatically be turnedon at outside temperatures above 23°F(−5°C) to defog the windshield, and the airrecirculation mode will automatically beturned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment to improve the defoggingperformance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed controlPush the fan control button to manuallycontrol the fan speed.

Push the AUTO button to return to automaticcontrol of the fan speed.

Air recirculationPush the air recirculation button torecirculate interior air inside the vehicle. Theindicator light on the switch will come on.

Push it again to make the air inlet controlledautomatically (FRESH, REC/FRE and RECIR-CULATION). The indicator will go out.

The air recirculation button will not be acti-vated when the air conditioner is in DEFmode.

Air flow control

Pushing the manual air flow control buttonselects the air outlet to:

: Air flows from center and side venti-lators.

: Air flows from center and side venti-lators and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flow from defroster and foot out-lets.

To turn system offPush the OFF button.

OPERATING TIPSO When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the airflow from the foot outlets may not operatefor 0 to 126 seconds. This is not amalfunction. After the coolant temperaturewarms up, air flow from the foot outlets


4-5

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

will operate normally.

The sensor on the instrument panel helpsmaintain a constant temperature. Do not putanything on or around this sensor.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The air conditioning system is equipped withan in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt,pollen, dust, etc. To make sure air conditionerheats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, re-place the filter in accordance with the main-tenance schedule in this manual. To replace

the filter, contact your INFINITI retailer.

The filter should be replaced if air flowis extremely decreased or when win-dows fog up easily during operatingheater or air conditioning system.

SERVICING AIR CONDI-TIONERThe air conditioning system in your INFINITIis charged with a refrigerant designed with theenvironment in mind. This refrigerant willnot harm the earth’s ozone layer. How-ever, special charging equipment and lubri-cant are required when servicing your INFINITIair conditioner. Using improper refrigerants orlubricants will cause severe damage to yourair conditioning system. See “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants” in the “10.Technical and consumer information” sectionfor air conditioning system refrigerant andlubricant recommendations.

Your INFINITI retailer will be able to service

your environmentally friendly air conditioningsystem.

WARNING

The air conditioner system containsrefrigerant under high pressure. Toavoid personal injury, any air condi-tioner service should be done only byan experienced technician withproper equipment.

AUDIO SYSTEM

RADIO

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and pressthe power on switch to turn on the radio. Ifyou listen to the radio with the engine notrunning, the key should be turned to the ACCposition.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

SII0082A


4-6

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

strength, distance from radio transmitter,buildings, bridges, mountains and other ex-ternal influences. Intermittent changes in re-ception quality normally are caused by theseexternal influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio receptionquality.

Radio reception

Your INFINITI radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhanceradio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance thequality of that reception.

However there are some general characteris-tics of both FM and AM radio signals that canaffect radio reception quality in a movingvehicle, even when the finest equipment isused. These characteristics are completelynormal in a given reception area, and do not

indicate any malfunction in your INFINITIradio system.

Remember that a moving vehicle is not theideal place to listen to a radio. Because of themovement, reception conditions will con-stantly change. Buildings, terrain, signal dis-tance and interference from other vehicles canwork against ideal reception. Described beloware some of the factors that can affect yourradio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (singlechannel) FM having slightly more range thanstereo FM. External influences may sometimesinterfere with FM station reception even if theFM station is within 25 miles (40 km). Thestrength of the FM signal is directly related tothe distance between the transmitter andreceiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sightpath, exhibiting many of the same character-istics as light. For example they will reflect offobjects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves awayfrom a station transmitter, the signals willtend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interferencefrom buildings, large hills or due to antennaposition, usually in conjunction with in-creased distance from the station transmitter,static or flutter can be heard. This can be

IHA018M


4-7

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

reduced by adjusting the TREBLE controlcounterclockwise to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and re-flected signals reach the receiver at the sametime. The signals may cancel each other,resulting in momentary flutter or loss ofsound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency,can bend around objects and skip along theground. In addition, the signals can bebounced off the ionosphere and bent back toearth. Because of these characteristics. AMsignals are also subject to interference as theytravel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur forseveral seconds during ionospheric turbu-lence even in areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even trafficlights.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAU-TIONS

Cassette player

O To maintain good quality sound,INFINITI recommends that you usecassette tapes of 60 minutes orshorter in length.

O Cassette tapes should be removedfrom the player when not in use.Store cassettes in their protectivecases and away from direct sunlight,heat, dust, moisture or magneticsources.

Direct sunlight can cause the cas-sette to become deformed. The use ofdeformed cassettes may cause thecassette to jam in the player.

O Do not use cassettes that have peel-ing or loose labels. If used, the labelcould jam in the player.

O If a cassette has loose tape, insert apencil through one of the cassettehubs and rewind the tape firmly.Loose tape may cause tape jammingand wavering sound quality.

O Over a period of time, the playbackhead, capstan and pinch roller maygather a tape coating residue as thetape passes over the head. This resi-due accumulation can cause a weakor wavering sound and should be re-moved periodically with a headcleaning tape.

If the residue is not removed periodi-cally, the player may need to be dis-assembled for cleaning.


4-8

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Compact disc (CD) player opera-tion

CAUTION

O During cold weather or rainy days,the player may malfunction due tothe humidity. If this occurs, re-move the CD and dehumidify orventilate the player completely.

O The player may skip while drivingon rough roads.

O The CD player sometimes cannotfunction when the compartmenttemperature is extremely high.Decrease the temperature beforeuse.

O Do not expose the CD to directsunlight.

O CDs that are of poor quality,dirty, scratched, or covered withfingerprints, or that have pinholes may not work properly.

O The following CDs may not workproperly.

• Copy control compact discs

• Recordable compact discs(CD-R)

• Rewritable compact discs(CD-RW)

O Do not use the following CDs asthey may cause the CD player tomalfunction.

• 8 cm (3.1 in) discs with anadapter

• CDs that are not round

• CDs with a paper label

• CDs that are warped,scratched, or have abnormaledges


4-9

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTEPLAYER

Refer to the separate Owner’s Manual forinformation about the navigation system.

Audio main operation

ONzOFF/Volume control :

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then pushthe ONzOFF/Volume control knob. The mode(radio or cassette) which was playing imme-diately before the system was turned offresumes playing. When no cassette is loaded,

the radio comes on. Pushing theONzOFF/Volume control knob again turns thesystem off.

Turn the ONzOFF/Volume control knob toadjust the volume.

AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE,FADER, BALANCE, SCV) :

Press the AUDIO button to change the select-ing mode as follows:

BASS → TREBLE → FADER → BALANCE→ BASS.

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader, Balance, pressthe AUDIO button until the desired modeBASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE appearsin the display.

Press the or button to adjustBass and Treble to the desired level. Use the

or button to adjust Fader orBalance modes. Fader adjusts the sound levelbetween the front and rear speakers andBalance adjusts the sound level between theright and left speakers.

After 10 seconds, the radio or cassette tapedisplay reappears. Once the sound quality isset to the desired level, press the AUDIO

SIH0131


4-10

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

button repeatedly until the radio or cassettetape display appears.

Radio/Cassette tape prioritymode

In this mode, the radio station illuminates inthe display during radio operation. Duringcassette tape operation, TAPE illuminates inthe display.

FM-AM radio operation

FM-AM band select :

Pushing the FM-AM band select button willchange the band as follows:

AM → AM (preset station) → FM1 → FM2→ FM (preset station) → AM

When FM/AM band select button is pushedwhile the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON,the radio will come on at the station lastplayed.

The last station played will also come on when

the power knob is turned to ON.

If a compact disc or tape is playing when theFM/AM band select button is turned to ON,the compact disc or tape will automatically beturned off and the last radio station played willcome on.

The FM stereo indicator ST illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broad-cast signal is weak, the radio automaticallychanges from stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning) :

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned whiledriving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation.

Use these buttons for manual tuning. To movequickly through the channels, hold either of

the TUNE buttons down for more than 0.5seconds.

SCAN tuning :

Push the SCAN tuning button and SCAN willilluminate in the display window. SCAN tun-ing begins from high to low or low to highfrequencies and stops at each broadcastingstation for 5 seconds. Pushing the buttonagain during this 5 second period stops SCANtuning and the radio remains tuned to thatstation.

If any of the SEEK/SCAN tuning buttons arenot pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuningmoves to the next station.

Station memory (and preset) opera-tions :

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band(six for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations canbe set for the AM band.

1. Tune to the desired station using the


4-11

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SCAN or TUNE buttons.

2. Select the desired station and keep push-ing any of the desired station memorybuttons (1 to 6) until a beep sound isheard. (The radio mutes when the selectbutton is pushed.)

3. The channel indicator will come on and thesound will resume. Memorizing is nowcomplete.

4. Other station select buttons can be set inthe same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if theradio fuse opens, the radio memory is can-celled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Program type :

When PTY button is pressed during FM mode,the PTY name of the current tuned station isdisplayed. During this time if the PTY datacode is zero, or the data is unreadable; thedisplay will show NONE.

1. PTY selection mode

PTY name selection can be done by theup/down TUNE button or inthe PTY selection mode.

It is possible to shift the PTY name by onestep, with one push of the up/down tuningbutton or .

PTY name selection can also be achieved bypressing the preset buttons.

Initial PTY names are stored in the presetbuttons; but these can be changed by pressingthe preset buttons for more than 1.5 secondswhen the desired PTY name is in the display. 2. PTY SEEK tuning

After selecting a PTY name, push theTUNE button or within 10seconds. Tuning to the PTY station willstart. If you do not push the TUNE buttonwithin the 10 second period, the PTYmode will be canceled.


4-12

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

3. PTY SCAN tuning mode

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune thePTY name station, and stop at each broad-casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing thebutton again during this 5 second periodwill stop SCAN tuning and the radio willremain tuned to that station. If the SCANtuning button is not pushed within 5seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the nextstation.

Cassette tape player operationTurn the ignition key to ACC or ON, thencarefully insert a cassette tape into the tapedoor.

The cassette tape automatically pulls into theplayer. The word TAPE and moving digitalsquares illuminate on the right side of thedisplay window.

CAUTION

Do not force the cassette tape into thetape door. This could cause playerdamage.

The cassette tape automatically changes di-rections to play the other side when the firstside is complete. At this time, the movingdigital squares illuminate on the left side ofthe display window.

PLAY :

When the TAPE/CD button is pushed with theradio turned on and the tape loaded, the radiowill automatically be turned off and the tapewill play.

If the TAPE/CD button is pushed during eitherthe FF , REW, APS FF or APS REW function,the cassette tape enters the normal play mode.

When the TAPE/CD button is pushed with theCD playing, the tape will play.

FF (fast forward),REW (rewind) :

Push either the FF or REW button for thedesired direction.

The FF or REW symbol illuminates in thedisplay.

To stop the FF or REW function, press the FFor REW button again, or the TAPE/CD button.

APS (automatic pro-gram search) FF, APSREW :

Push either the APS FF or APS REW buttonwhile the cassette tape is playing. The taperuns quickly, stops, then plays the nextselection. Either the FF or REW symbolflashes in the display while searching for theselection.

This system searches at the blank intervals


4-13

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

between selections. If there is a blank intervalwithin one selection or there is no intervalbetween selections, the system may not stopin the desired or expected location.

PROG (program) :

Push the PROG button. The moving digitalsquares illuminate on either the right or leftside of the display window to indicate the sideof program play.

If the PROG button is pushed during either theFF or REW function the tape enters the normalplay mode.

Dolby NR (Noise Reduction) :

Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NRencoded tapes to reduce high frequency tapenoise. The indicator light comes on.

Dolby NR is manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.DOLBY NR and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories

Licensing Corporation.

Metal or chrome tape usage :

The cassette player is automatically set to highperformance play when playing a metal orchrome cassette tape.

TAPE EJECT :

Push the EJECT button. The cassette tapeautomatically comes out.


4-14

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

1. CD LOAD button2. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK

CHANGE button3. ONzOFF/VOLUME control knob4. SCAN tuning button5. AUTO.P (Automatic preset) button6. CD play button7. TAPE play button8. FM/AM band select button9. PTY (Program type) button10.RPT (repeat) play button11.AUDIO (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BAL-

ANCE and NR (Dolby)) button12.CD EJECT button13.RADIO TUNE/FFzREW/AUDIO (Bass,

treble, fader, balance) ADJUSTING button14.Station and preset (FM/AM)/CD insert or

CD play select button15.TAPE EJECT button

SIH0132


4-15

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTEPLAYER AND COMPACT DISC(CD) PLAYER/CHANGER

Audio main operation

Head unit

The radio has an FM diversity receptionsystem, which employs two antennas printedon the front window. This system automati-cally switches to the antenna which is receiv-ing less interference.

The tape deck employs a permalloy headwhich allows for improved reproduction ofhigh frequency ranges. Noise is also greatlyreduced by the combined use of the Dolby NR(Noise Reduction) system. The auto loudnesscircuit enhances the low frequency rangeautomatically in both radio reception and tapeand CD playback.

ONzOFF/Volume control :

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then

push the ONzOFF/VOL control knob while thesystem is off to call up the mode (radio, tapeor CD) which was playing immediately beforethe system was turned off. When no CD ortape is loaded, the radio will come on. Whilethe system is on, pushing the ONzOFF/VOLcontrol knob turns the system off.

To turn the radio off, press the ONzOFF/VOLcontrol knob.

Turn the ONzOFF/VOL control knob to adjustthe volume.

AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE,FADER, BALANCE and NR (Dolby)) :

Press the AUDIO button to change the select-ing mode as follows.

BASS → TREBLE → FADER → BALANCE→ NR (when cassette playing) → BASS

To adjust BASS, Treble, Fader and Balance,press the AUDIO button until the desiredmode BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE

appears in the display. Press the TUNE( ) or ( ) button to adjust Bassand Treble to the desired level. Use the

or button also to adjust Fader orBalance modes. Fader adjusts the sound levelbetween the front and rear speakers andBalance adjusts the sound between the rightand left speakers.

To change the NR (Dolby) mode to OFF orON, press the or (TUNE) buttonwhile cassette tape is playing. When Dolby isON, the display indicates the mark.

After 10 seconds, the radio or cassette tapedisplay reappears. Once the sound quality isset to the desired level, press the AUDIObutton repeatedly until the radio or cassettetape display appears.

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. Dolby NR and the double-Dsymbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-


4-16

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

ratories Licensing Corporation.

Metal or chrome tape usage :

The cassette player will be automatically set tohigh performance play when playing a metalor chrome cassette tape.

FM-AM radio operation

FM/AM band select :

Pushing the FM/AM band select button willchange the band as follows:

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

When FM/AM band select button is pushedwhile the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON,the radio will come on at the station lastplayed.

The last station played will also come on whenthe power knob is turned to ON.

If a compact disc or tape is playing when theFM/AM band select button is turned to ON,the compact disc or tape will automatically be

turned off and the last radio station played willcome on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broad-cast signal is weak, the radio will automati-cally change from stereo to monaural recep-tion.

TUNE (Tuning) :

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned whiledriving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation.

Use these buttons for manual tuning. To movequickly through the channels, hold either ofthe TUNE buttons down for more than 0.5seconds.

SEEK tuning :

Push the SEEK button or , totune from high to low or low to high frequen-cies and stops at the next broadcastingstation.

SCAN tuning :

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from lowto high frequencies and stops at each broad-casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing thebutton again during this 5 seconds period willstop SCAN tuning and the radio will remaintuned to that station.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushedwithin 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to thenext station.

Station memory operations :

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band(six for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations canbe set for the AM band.

1. Tune to the desired station using the


4-17

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SEEK, SCAN or TUNE button.

2. Select the desired station and keep push-ing any of the desired station memorybuttons (1 to 6) until a beep sound isheard. (For example, in the diagram ch2 isto be memorized. The radio mutes whenthe select button is pushed.)

3. The indicator ch2 will then come on andthe sound will resume. Memorizing is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the samemanner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if thefuse blows, the radio memory will be can-celled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

(Automatic preset) button :

To select the preset FM, AM or PTY station,push the AUTOP button for less than 1.5seconds.

To preset the FM, AM or PTY station, push

the AUTOP button for more than 1.5 seconds.

(Program type) button :

When PTY button is pressed during FM mode,the PTY name of the current tuned station isdisplayed. During this time if the PTY datacode is zero, or the data is unreadable; thedisplay will show NONE.

1. PTY selection mode

PTY name selection can be done by theup/down TUNE button or inthe PTY selection mode.

After selecting a PTY name, push theTUNE button or within 10seconds. Tuning to the PTY station willstart. If you do not push the TUNE buttonwithin the 10 second period, the PTYmode will be canceled.

It is possible to shift the PTY name by onestep, with one push of the up/down tuningbutton or .

PTY name selection can also be achieved bypressing the preset buttons.

Initial PTY names are stored in the presetbuttons; but these can be changed by pressingthe preset buttons for more than 1.5 secondswhen the desired PTY name is in the display.


4-18

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

2. PTY SCAN tuning mode

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune thePTY name station, and stop at each broad-casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing thebutton again during this 5 second periodwill stop SCAN tuning and the radio willremain tuned to that station. If the SCANtuning button is not pushed within 5seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the nextstation.

Cassette tape player operationTurn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenlightly insert the cassette tape into the tapedoor. The cassette tape will be automaticallypulled into the player.

The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) andthe cassette tape will begin to play.

CAUTION

Do not force the cassette tape into thetape door. This could cause playerdamage.

If the system is turned off by pushing theONzOFF/VOL control knob with the cassettetape still in the player, the tape will resumeplaying when the system is turned back on.

PLAY :

O When the TAPE button is pushed with thesystem turned off and a tape loaded, thesystem will come on and the tape will play.

O When the TAPE button is pushed witheither the radio or compact disc turned onand the tape loaded, the compact disc orthe radio will automatically be turned offand the tape will play.

O When the TAPE button is pushed while thetape is being played, the tape side will bechanged.

FF (Fast Forward),REW (Rewind) :

Push the (fast forward) button to fastforward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the

(rewind) button. Either the FF or REWsymbol illuminates on the right side of thedisplay window. To stop the FF or REWfunction, press the (fast forward) or

(rewind) again, or the TAPE button.

APS (Automatic Pro-gram Search) FF,APS REW :

When the (APS FF) button is pushedwhile the tape is being played, the nextprogram will start to play from the beginning.Push the (APS FF) button several timesto skip through programs. The tape willadvance the number of times the button is


4-19

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

pushed (up to nine programs).

When the (APS REW) button is pushedonce, the program being played starts overfrom the beginning. Push the (APSREW) button several times to skip backseveral selections. The tape will go back thenumber of times the button is pushed. Eitherthe FF or REW symbol flashes on the rightside of the display window while searching forthe selection.

This system searches for the blank intervalsbetween selections. If there is a blank intervalwithin one program or there is no intervalbetween programs, the system may not stop inthe desired or expected location.

SCAN tuning :

Push the SCAN tuning button while playingtape, and it stops at the next tape program for5 seconds. Pushing the button again duringthis 5 second period will stop SCAN tuningand the tape program is continued. If the

SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next tapeprogram.

TAPE EJECT :

When this button is pushed with the tapeloaded, the tape will be ejected.When the tape is ejected while it is beingplayed, the system will be turned off.

Compact disc (CD) changer op-eration

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ONposition and insert the compact disc into theslot with the label side facing up. The compactdisc will be guided automatically into the slotand start playing.After loading the disc, the number of tracks onthe disc and the play time will appear on thedisplay.If the radio or tape is already operating, it will

automatically turn off and the compact discwill play.

CAUTION

Do not force the compact disc into theslot. This could damage the player.

If the system has been turned off while thecompact disc was playing, pushing theONzOFF/VOL control knob will start the com-pact disc.

8 cm diameter compact discs can also beused without an adapter.

button :

To insert a CD in the CD changer, push theLOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Andselect the loading slot by pushing the CDinsert select button (1 to 6) then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push the


4-20

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The inserted slot numbers will illuminate onthe display.

PLAY :

When the CD6 button is pushed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded, thesystem will turn on and the compact disc willstart to play.

When the CD6 button is pushed with thecompact disc loaded but the tape or the radioplaying, the tape or radio will automatically beturned off and the compact disc will start toplay.

FF (Fast Forward),REW (Rewind) :

When the (fast forward) or (re-wind) button is pushed while the compact discis being played, the compact disc will playwhile fast forwarding or rewinding. When thebutton is released, the compact disc will

return to normal play speed.

APS (AutomaticProgram Search)FF, APS REW :

When the (APS FF) button is pushedwhile the compact disc is being played, theprogram next to the present one will start toplay from its beginning. Push several times toskip through programs. The compact disc willadvance the number of times the button ispushed. (When the last program on thecompact disc is skipped through, the firstprogram will be played.) When the

(APS REW) button is pushed, the pro-gram being played returns to its beginning.Push several times to skip back throughprograms. The compact disc will go back thenumber of times the button is pushed.

CD PLAY button :

To change CD, push the CD play select button(1 to 6).

SCAN tuning :

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed forless than 1.5 seconds while the CD is beingplayed, the beginning of all the tracks of CDswill be played for 10 seconds in sequence.

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed formore than 1.5 seconds while the CD is beingplayed, the first program in all the CDs will beplayed for 10 seconds.

Pushing the button again during this 10second period will stop SCAN tuning.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushedwithin 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to thenext disc program.

REPEAT (RPT) :

When the RPT button is pushed while thecompact disc is played, the play pattern canbe changed as follows:


4-21

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

DISPLAY CD TEXT :

To indicate the CD mode text, push the PTYbutton during CD playing.

To change the indicated text, push the PTYbutton.

The text will change as follows:

If the text is more than 11 letters, push theAUTO.P button to display the remaining text.

CD EJECT :

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with thecompact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

To eject the discs selected by the CD selectbutton, push the EJECT button for less than1.5 seconds.

To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button

for more than 1.5 seconds.

If the compact disc comes out and is notremoved, it will be pulled back into theslot to protect it. (without 8 cm diametercompact discs)

CD IN indicator :

CD IN indicator appears on the display whenthe CD is loaded with the system on.

CD CARE AND CLEANING

O Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the

surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.

O Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

O To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean, softcloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circularmotion.Do not use a conventional record cleaneror alcohol intended for industrial use.

O A new disc may be rough on its inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edgesusing the side of a pen or pencil asillustrated.

SIH0082


4-22

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

STEERING WHEEL SWITCHFOR AUDIO CONTROL (if soequipped)

The audio system can be operated using thecontrols on the steering wheel.

MODE select switchPush the mode select switch to change themode in the sequence of AM, FM1, FM2, CD,(if so equipped) CD autochanger and Tape.

Volume control switches

Push the upper side switch or lower sideswitch to adjust the volume.

Upper side: Volume increases

Lower side: Volume decreases

Tuning

Memory change (radio) :

Push the tuning switch or forless than 1.5 seconds to change the radiofrequency.

SEEK tuning (radio) :

Push the tuning switch or formore than 1.5 seconds to seek the next orprevious radio station.

APS (Automatic Program Search)FF, APS REW (tape/CD) :

Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5seconds while the tape/CD is being played,

the next program will start to play from thebeginning.

Push the switch several times to skipthrough programs. The tape/CD will advancethe number of times the switch is pushed (upto nine programs).

Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5seconds and, the program being played startsover from the beginning.

Push the switch several times to skipback several selections. The tape/CD will goback the number of times the switch ispushed. Either the FF or REW symbol flasheson the right side of the display window whilesearching for the selection.

This system searches for the blank intervalsbetween selections. If there is a blank intervalwithin one program or there is no intervalbetween programs, the system may not stop inthe desired or expected location.

SIH0085


4-23

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind)(tape) :

Push the tuning button for more than1.5 seconds to fast forward the tape. Torewind the tape, push the tuning button

for more than 1.5 seconds. Either theFF or REW symbol illuminates on the rightside of the display window.

To stop the FF or REW function, press theor button again for more than 1.5

seconds.

ANTENNA

Power antennaThe antenna will automatically extend whenthe radio is turned on, and retract whenswitched off. If the radio is left on, the antennawill retract and extend with the ignition keyOFF-ON operation.

CAUTION

O Before turning the radio on, makesure that no one is near the an-tenna outlet and there is enoughspace for it to extend.

O To prevent damage, be sure thatpower antenna is fully retractedbefore the vehicle enters an auto-matic car wash.

O Dirt and other foreign matter onthe power antenna rod may inter-rupt its operation. Clean the rodperiodically with a damp cloth.This type of cleaning is especiallyimportant during the winter sea-sons in areas where road salt andother chemicals may be spreadon road surfaces and splashed

onto the antenna rod.

Window antennaThe antenna pattern is printed inside thewindshield.

CAUTION

O Do not place metalized film nearthe windshield glass or attach anymetal parts to it. This may causepoor reception or noise.

O When cleaning the inside of thewindshield, be careful not toscratch or damage the windshieldwindow antenna. Lightly wipealong the antenna with a damp-ened soft cloth.


4-24

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIOWhen installing a car phone or a CB radio inyour INFINITI, be sure to observe the follow-ing cautions, otherwise the new equipmentmay adversely affect the Engine Control sys-tem and other electronic parts.

WARNING

O A cellular telephone should not beused while driving so full attentionmay be given to vehicle operation.Some jurisdictions prohibit theuse of cellular telephones whiledriving.

O If you must make a call while yourvehicle is in motion, the handsfree cellular phone operationalmode (if so equipped) is highlyrecommended. Exercise extremecaution at all times so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle op-eration.

O If a conversation in a movingvehicle requires you to takenotes, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop your vehiclebefore doing so.

CAUTION

O Keep the antenna as far as pos-sible away from the Engine Con-trol Module (ECM).

O Keep the antenna wire more than8 in (20 cm) away from the PCMEharness. Do not route the antennawire next to any harness.

O Adjust the antenna standing-waveratio as recommended by the

manufacturer.

O Connect the ground wire from theCB radio chassis to the body.

O For details, consult an authorizedINFINITI retailer.


4-25

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

5 STARTING AND DRIVING

Precautions when starting and driving ....... 5-2Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)............ 5-2Three way catalyst ................................ 5-3On-pavement and offroad drivingprecautions............................................. 5-4Avoiding collision and rollover............... 5-4Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving........ 5-5Driving safety precautions...................... 5-5

Ignition switch ............................................. 5-8Key positions.......................................... 5-9Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System ....... 5-9

Before starting the engine........................... 5-9Starting the engine.................................... 5-10Driving the vehicle ..................................... 5-11

Automatic transmission ....................... 5-11Parking brake............................................. 5-16Cruise control ............................................ 5-17

Precautions on cruise control .............. 5-17Cruise control operations..................... 5-17

Intelligent cruise control system(if so equipped) ......................................... 5-19

Driving with intelligent cruise controlsystem.................................................. 5-21Intelligent cruise control switch........... 5-25Intelligent cruise control systemdisplay .................................................. 5-25Operating intelligent cruisecontrol system .................................... 5-26How to change the set vehiclespeed .................................................... 5-29How to change the set distance to the ve-hicle ahead ........................................... 5-29Approach warning ................................ 5-31Automatic cancellation......................... 5-32Warning indicator................................. 5-32How to handle the sensor.................... 5-33

Break-in schedule ...................................... 5-34Increasing fuel economy ........................... 5-34

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Using four wheel drive (4WD) .................. 5-35Transfer case shifting procedures........ 5-35

Parking/parking on hills............................. 5-43Power steering........................................... 5-44Brake system ............................................. 5-45

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .............. 5-45Cold weather driving ................................. 5-47

Freeing a frozen door lock ................... 5-47

Anti-freeze ............................................ 5-47Battery.................................................. 5-47Draining of coolant water .................... 5-47Tire equipment ..................................... 5-48Special winter equipment..................... 5-49Driving on snow or ice ........................ 5-49Engine block heater (if so equipped)... 5-50

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

PRECAUTIONS WHENSTARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING

O Do not leave children or adultswho would normally require thesupport of others alone in your ve-hicle. Pets should not be left aloneeither. They could accidentally in-jure themselves or others throughinadvertent operation of the ve-hicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehiclecould quickly become high enoughto cause severe or possibly fatalinjuries to people or animals.


EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monox-ide)

WARNING

Do not breathe exhaust gases. Theycontain colorless and odorless car-bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide isdangerous. It can cause uncon-sciousness or death.

O If you suspect that exhaust fumesare entering the vehicle, drivewith all windows fully open, andhave the vehicle inspected imme-diately.

O Do not run the engine in closedspaces such as a garage.

O Do not park the vehicle with theengine running for any extendedlength of time.

O Keep the back door and glasshatch closed while driving, other-wise exhaust gases could bedrawn into the passenger com-partment. If you must drive withthe back door or glass hatch openfollow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculationswitch OFF and the fan con-trol at high to circulate theair.

O If electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass to a trailerthrough the seal on the trunk lidor the body, follow the manufac-turer’s recommendation to pre-vent carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle.

STARTING AND DRIVING

5-2

Z 02.9.12/JR50-D X

O If a special body on other equip-ment is added for recreational orother usage, follow the manufac-turer’s recommendation to pre-vent carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle. (Some recreationalvehicle appliances such asstoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc.may also generate carbon monox-ide.)

O The exhaust system and bodyshould be inspected by a quali-fied mechanic whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumesare entering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involv-ing damage to the exhaust sys-tem, underbody, or rear of thevehicle.

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Ex-haust gases in the three way catalyst areburned at high temperatures to help reducepollutants.

WARNING

O The exhaust gas and the exhaustsystem are very hot. Keep people,animals or flammable materialsaway from the exhaust systemcomponents.

O Do not stop or park the vehicleover flammable materials such asdry grass, waste paper or rags.They may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

O Do not use leaded gasoline. De-posits from leaded gasoline seri-ously reduce the three way cata-lyst ability to reduce exhaust pol-lutants.

O Keep your engine tuned up. Mal-functions in the ignition, fuel in-jection, or electrical systems cancause overrich fuel flow into thethree way catalyst, causing it tooverheat. Do not keep driving ifthe engine misfires, or if notice-


5-3

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

able loss of performance or otherunusual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle in-spected promptly by an autho-rized INFINITI retailer.

O Avoid driving with an extremelylow fuel level. Running out of fuelcould cause the engine to misfire,damaging the three way catalyst.

O Do not race the engine whilewarming it up.

O Do not push or tow your vehicle tostart the engine.

ON-PAVEMENT ANDOFFROAD DRIVING PRECAU-TIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantlyhigher rollover rate than other types ofvehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than pas-senger cars to make them capable of perform-ing in a variety of on-pavement and offroadapplications. This gives them a higher centerof gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage ofhigher ground clearance is a better view of theroad, allowing you to anticipate problems.However, they are not designed for corneringat the same speeds as conventional two-wheeldrive vehicles any more than low-slung sportscars are designed to perform satisfactorilyunder offroad conditions. If at all possible,avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers par-ticularly at high speeds. As with other vehiclesof this type, failure to operate this vehiclecorrectly may result in loss of control orvehicle rollover.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in asafe and prudent manner may resultin loss of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessivespeed, high speed cornering, or sudden steer-ing maneuvers, because these driving prac-tices could cause you to lose control of yourvehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss ofcontrol could result in a collision withother vehicles or objects, or cause thevehicle to rollover, particularly if theloss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times,and avoid driving when tired. Never drivewhen under the influence of alcohol or drugs


5-4

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

(including prescription or over-the-counterdrugs which may cause drowsiness). Alwayswear your seat belt as outlined in the “1.Seats, restraints and supplemental air bagsystems” section of this manual, and alsoinstruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury incollisions and rollovers. In a rollovercrash, an unbelted person is signifi-cantly more likely to die than a personwearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-stream reduces coordination, delaysreaction time and impairs judge-

ment. Driving after drinking alcoholincreases the likelihood of beinginvolved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, ifyou are injured in the accident alco-hol can increase the severity of theinjury.

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. But, youmust choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol related accidents.Although the local laws vary on what isconsidered to be legally intoxicated, the fact isthat alcohol affects all people differently andmost people underestimate the effects ofalcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

And that’s true for drugs too (over the counter,prescription, and illegal drugs). Do not drive ifyour ability to operate your vehicle is impaired

by alcohol, drugs, or some other physicalcondition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAU-TIONS

Your INFINITI is designed for both normal andoffroad use. However, avoid driving in deepwater or mud as your INFINITI is mainlydesigned for leisure use, unlike a conventionaloffroad vehicle.

WARNING

O Drive carefully when off the roadand avoid dangerous areas. Everyperson who drives or rides in thisvehicle should be seated withtheir seat belt fastened. Keep youand your passengers in positionwhen driving over rough terrain.


5-5

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O Before driving up or down grades,check the road surface for bumpsor potholes. Be sure to climb agentle slope and descend agentle slope.

O Do not drive across steep slopes.Instead drive either straight up orstraight down the slopes. Off-roadvehicles can tip over sidewaysmuch more easily than they canforward or backward.

O Many hills are too steep for anyvehicle. If you drive up them, youmay stall. If you drive down them,you may not be able to controlyour speed. If you drive acrossthem, you may roll over.

O Do not shift gears while drivingon downhill grades as this couldcause loss of control of the ve-

hicle.

O Be sure to use the engine brake.The foot brake performance maybe reduced, resulting in a pos-sible accident.

O Stay alert when driving to the topof a hill. At the top there could bea drop-off or other hazard thatcould cause an accident.

O If your engine stalls or you cannotmake it to the top of a steep hill,never attempt to turn around.Your vehicle could tip or rollover. Always back straight downin R (Reverse) gear. Never backdown in N (Neutral), using onlythe brake, as this could causeloss of control.

O Heavy braking going down a hill

could cause your brakes to over-heat and fade, resulting in loss ofcontrol and an accident. Applybrakes lightly and use a low gearto control your speed.

O Unsecured cargo can be thrownaround when driving over roughterrain. Properly secure all cargoso it will not be thrown forwardand cause injury to you or yourpassengers.

O To avoid raising the center ofgravity excessively, do not ex-ceed the rated capacity of the roofrack and evenly distribute theload. Secure heavy loads in thecargo area as for forward and aslow as possible. Do not equip thevehicle with tires larger thanspecified in this manual. This


5-6

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

could cause your vehicle to rollover.

O Do not grip the inside or spokes ofthe steering wheel when drivingoffroad. The steering wheel couldmove suddenly and injure yourhands. Instead drive with yourfingers and thumbs on the outsideof the rim.

O Before operating the vehicle, en-sure that the driver and all pas-sengers have their seat belts fas-tened.

O Always drive with the floor matsin place as the floor may becomehot.

O Lower your speed when encoun-tering strong crosswinds. With ahigher center of gravity, your

INFINITI is more affected bystrong side winds. Slower speedsensure better vehicle control.

O Do not drive beyond the perfor-mance of the tires, even with4WD engaged. Acceleratingquickly, sharp steering maneu-vers or sudden braking may causeloss of control.

O If at all possible, avoid sharpturning maneuvers, particularlyat high speeds. Your INFINITIfour-wheel drive vehicle has ahigher center of gravity than atwo-wheel drive vehicle. The ve-hicle is not designed for corner-ing at the same speeds as con-ventional two-wheel drivevehicles. Failure to operate thisvehicle correctly could result in

loss of control and/or a roll overaccident.

O Always use tires of the sametype, size, brand, construction(bias, bias-belted or radial), andtread pattern on all four wheels.Install tire chains on the rearwheels when driving on slipperyroads and drive carefully.

O Be sure to check the brakes im-mediately after driving in mud orwater. See “Brake system” laterin this section for “wet brakes”.

O Avoid parking your vehicle onsteep hills. If you get out of thevehicle and it rolls forward, back-ward or sideways, you could beinjured.

O Whenever you drive off-road


5-7

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

through sand, mud or water asdeep as the wheel hub, morefrequent maintenance may be re-quired. See “Periodic mainte-nance” in the “9. Maintenance”section of this manual.

IGNITION SWITCHThe switch includes an anti-theft steering lockdevice.

The ignition lock is designed so that the keycannot be turned to LOCK and removed untilthe selector lever is moved to the P (Park)position.

When removing the key from the ignition,make sure the selector lever is in the Pposition.

If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park),the key cannot be moved toward LOCK.

When the key cannot be turned toward theLOCK position, proceed as follows to removethe key:

1) Move the selector lever into the P position.

2) Turn the ignition key slightly in the ONdirection.

3) Turn the key toward the LOCK position.

4) Remove the key.

If the key is removed from the ignition switch,the selector lever cannot be moved from P

(Park). The selector lever can be movedif the ignition switch is in the ONposition and the foot brake pedal isdepressed.

There is an OFF position in between LOCKand ACC, although it does not show on thelock cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF thesteering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/6 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the keyto the LOCK position. Remove the key.To unlock the steering wheel, insert thekey and turn it gently while rotating thesteering wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to theSIS0044


5-8

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

LOCK position while driving. Thesteering wheel will lock. This maycause the driver to lose control of thevehicle and could result in seriousvehicle damage or personal injury.

KEY POSITIONSLOCK (Normal parking position) (0)

The ignition key can only be removed whenthe switch is in this position.

OFF (1)

The engine can be turned off without lockingthe steering wheel.

ACC (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is notrunning. The automatic transmission selectorlever can be shifted.

ON (Normal operating position) (3)

This position turns on the ignition system andthe electrical accessories.

START (4)

This position activates the starter motor,starting the engine.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBI-LIZER SYSTEMThe Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System willnot allow the engine to start without the use ofthe registered Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem key.

If the engine fails to start using the registeredInfiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System key (forexample, when interference is caused byanother Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkey, an automated toll road device or auto-mated payment device on the key ring), restartthe engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF orLOCK position, and wait approximately 5seconds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered Infiniti VehicleImmobilizer System key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, INFINITIrecommends placing the registered InfinitiVehicle Immobilizer System key on a separatekey ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

BEFORE STARTING THE EN-GINEO Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

O Check fluid levels such as engine oil,coolant, brake and clutch fluid, window


5-9

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

washer fluid as frequently as possible, atleast whenever you refuel.

O Check to be sure that all windows and lightlenses are clean.

O Visually inspect tires for condition. Alsocheck tire pressure.

O Lock all doors.

O Position seat and adjust head restraints.

O Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

O Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

O Check the operation of warning lightswhen key is turned to the ON (3) position.

STARTING THE ENGINE1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the automatic transmission selectlever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). (P pre-ferred.)

NOTE:

The selector lever cannot be moved outof P and into any of the other gear po-sitions if the ignition key is turned toLOCK or if the key is removed from theswitch.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe selector lever is in one of the drivingpositions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turning the igni-tion key to START. Release the key whenthe engine starts. If the engine starts, butfails to run, repeat the above procedure.

O When the engine is very hard to startin extremely cold weather or whenrestarting, depress the acceleratorpedal a little (approximately 1/5 to thefloor) and hold it, then crank theengine. Release the key and the ac-

celerator pedal when the enginestarts.

O When the engine is very hard to startbecause it is flooded, depress theaccelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and hold it. Crank the engine for5 to 6 seconds. After cranking theengine, release the accelerator pedal.Crank the engine with your foot offthe accelerator pedal by turningthe ignition key to START. Releasethe key when the engine starts. If theengine starts, but fails to run, repeatthe above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for morethan 15 seconds at a time. If the en-gine does not start, turn the key off


5-10

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

and wait 10 seconds beforecranking again, otherwise thestarter could be damaged.

4. Warm-upAllow the engine to idle for at least 30seconds after starting. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especiallyin cold weather.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The automatic transmission in your vehicle iselectronically controlled by a transmissioncontrol module to produce maximum powerand smooth operation.

Recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the followingpages. Follow these procedures for maximumvehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

See “Using four wheel drive” later in thissection.

Starting the vehicle

O After starting the engine, fully depress thefoot brake pedal and push the selector leverbutton before shifting the selector leverfrom P to the R, N, D, 2 or 1 position. Be

sure the vehicle is fully stopped before at-tempting to shift the selector lever from orto P or R.

This automatic transmission is de-signed so that the foot brake pedalMUST be depressed before shifting fromP (Park) to any drive position while theignition switch is ON.

NOTE:

The selector lever cannot be moved outof P (Park) and into any of the other gearpositions if the ignition key is turned tothe LOCK position or if the key is re-moved from the switch.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andpush the selector lever button to shift intoa driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and foot brake,then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

SIS0056


5-11

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WARNING

O Do not depress the acceleratorpedal while shifting from P or N toR, D, 2 or 1. Always depress thebrake pedal until shifting is com-pleted. Failure to do so couldcause you to lose control and havean accident.

O Cold engine idle speed is high, souse caution when shifting into aforward or reverse gear beforethe engine has warmed up.

O Never shift to P or R while vehicleis moving forward. Never shift toP or D while vehicle is movingrearward. This could cause anaccident.

O On slippery roads, do not down-

shift. This may cause a loss ofcontrol.

O If the selector lever cannot bemoved from the P (Park) positionwhile the engine is running andthe brake pedal depressed, thestop lights may not work. Mal-functioning stop lights couldcause an accident, injuring your-self and others.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an up-hill grade, do not hold the vehicle bydepressing the accelerator pedal.The foot brakes should be used forthis purpose.

Shifting

Push the button to shift into P , or from N toR, P to R and D to 2. All other positions canbe selected without pushing the button.

SIS0054


5-12

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle isparked or when starting the engine. Make surethe vehicle is completely stopped. The brakepedal must be depressed to move the selectorlever from N or any drive position to P . Applythe parking brake. When parking on a hill, ap-

ply the parking brake first, then shift the leverinto the P position.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always be surethe vehicle is completely stopped when se-lecting R. The brake pedal must be depressed

to move the selector lever from P , N or anydrive position to R.

N (Neutral):

Neither forward or reverse gear is engaged.The engine can be started in this position.You may shift to N and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving.

2 (Second gear):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades or starting on slippery roads.

Push in the selector lever button and move theselector lever from the D to 2 position.

Do not downshift into the 2 position at speedsover the following speeds and do not exceedthe following speeds in the 2 position:

SIS0057

SIS0058


5-13

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

2WD and AUTO:60 MPH (95 km/h)

4H:50 MPH (80 km/h)

4LO:22 MPH (35 km/h)

1 (Low gear):

Use this position when climbing steep hillsslowly or driving slowly through deep snow,sand or mud, or for maximum engine brakingon steep downhill grades.

Do not downshift into the 1 position at speedsover the following speed and do not exceedthe following speeds in the 1 position:

2WD and AUTO:30 MPH (50 km/h)

4H:30 MPH (50 km/h)

4LO:10 MPH (15 km/h)

Shift lock release If the battery charge is low, the select levermay not be moved from the P position evenwith the brake pedal depressed and the selectlever button pushed.

To move the select lever, push the shift lockrelease button and select lever button with theparking brake securely applied and the brakepedal firmly depressed. The select lever canbe moved to N (Neutral).

To push the shift lock release button, followthe procedure as illustrated.

If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park),have your INFINITI retailer check the auto-matic transmission system as soon as pos-sible.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be movedfrom the P position while the engine

SIS0052


5-14

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

is running and the brake pedal isdepressed, the stop lights may notwork. Malfunctioning stoplightscould cause an accident injuringyourself and others.

Accelerator downshift— In D position —For passing or hill climbing, fully depress theaccelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts thetransmission down into second gear or firstgear, depending on the vehicle speed.

Overdrive switch

Each time your vehicle is started, the trans-mission is automatically reset to overdrive on.

ON: For normal driving the Overdriveswitch is engaged. The transmissionis upshifted into Overdrive as thevehicle speed increases.

The overdrive does not engage until theengine has warmed up.

OFF: For driving up and down long slopeswhere engine braking would be ad-

vantageous, push the overdriveswitch. The O/D OFF light illumi-nates. When cruising at a low speedor climbing a gentle slope, you mayfeel uncomfortable shift shocks as thetransmission shifts between 3rd andoverdrive repeatedly. In this case,press the overdrive switch. The O/DOFF indicator light comes on at thistime.

When driving conditions change, press theoverdrive switch again. The O/D OFF indicatorlight goes out.

Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time with the O/D OFFlight illuminated. This reduces the fueleconomy.

Fail-safe

When the Fail-safe operation occurs, the nexttime the key is turned to the ON position, theO/D OFF light will blink for approximately 8

SIS0055


5-15

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

seconds after coming on for 2 seconds. Whilethe vehicle can be driven under these circum-stances please note that the gears in theautomatic transmission may be locked in thirdgear.

If the vehicle is driven under extremeconditions, such as excessive wheelspinning and subsequent hard braking,the Fail-safe system may be activated.This will occur even if all electrical cir-cuits are functioning properly. In thiscase, turn the ignition key OFF and waitfor 3 seconds. Then turn the key back tothe ON position. The vehicle should re-turn to its normal operating condition. Ifit does not return to its normal operatingcondition have your INFINITI retailercheck the transmission and repair ifnecessary.

PARKING BRAKE

To apply: pull the lever up.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the selector lever to the P position.

3. While pulling up on the lever slightly,push the button and lower completely.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

WARNING

O Be sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving. Failure todo so can cause brake failure andlead to an accident.

O Do not release the parking brakefrom outside the vehicle.

O Do not use the gear shift in placeof the parking brake. When park-ing, be sure the parking brake isfully engaged.

O Do not leave children unattendedin a vehicle. They could releasethe parking brake and cause anaccident.

SIS0022


5-16

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CRUISE CONTROLPRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROLO If the SET control system malfunctions, it

cancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver.

O If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control main switch off and have thesystem checked by your INFINITI retailer.

O The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control main switch is turned onwhile pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located on thesteering wheel). To properly set the cruisecontrol system, perform the precedingsteps in the order indicated.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control whendriving under the following condi-tions:

O it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

O in heavy traffic or in traffic thatvaries in speed.

O on winding or hilly roads.

O on slippery roads (rain, snow,ice, etc.)

O in very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of ve-hicle control and result in anaccident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERA-TIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speedbetween 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)without keeping your foot on the acceleratorpedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push themain switch on. The cruise indicator light onthe meter panel will come on.

To set at cruising speed, accelerate yourvehicle to the desired speed, push the

SIS0060


5-17

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

COAST/SET switch and release it. (The SET in-dicator light will come on.) Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will main-tain the set speed.

O To pass another vehicle, depress theaccelerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle will return to the previ-ously set speed.

O The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, follow any ofthese methods:

a) Push the CANCEL switch; The SET indi-cator light will go out.

b) Tap the brake pedal; The SET indicatorlight will go out.

c) Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISEindicator and SET indicator lights will goout.

O If you depress the brake pedal whilepushing the RES/ACCEL set switch andreset at the cruising speed, turn the mainswitch off once and then turn it on again.

O The cruise control will automatically becancelled if the vehicle slows down belowapproximately 8 MPH (13 km/h).

O Move the selector lever to N (Neutral)position. The SET light will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:

a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

b) Push and hold the RES/ACCEL set switch.When the vehicle attains the speed youdesire, release the switch.

c) Push, then quickly release the RES/ACCELset switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:

a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.Release the switch when the vehicle slowsdown to the desired speed.

c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/SETswitch. Each time you do this, the setspeed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the RES/ACCEL set switch. The vehiclewill resume the last set cruising speed whenthe vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).


5-18

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CON-TROL SYSTEM (if soequipped)The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) systemautomatically maintains a selected distancefrom the vehicle in front of you according tothat vehicle’s speed, or at the set speed, if theroad ahead is clear.

With ICC, the driver can maintain the samespeed as other vehicles without the constantneed to adjust the speed as you would with anormal cruise control system.

The system is intended to enhance the opera-tion of the vehicle when following anothervehicle traveling in the same lane and direc-tion. If the distance sensor detects a slowermoving vehicle ahead of you, the system willreduce your speed so that you follow thevehicle in front of you at the selected distance.The system automatically controls the throttleand applies the brakes (up to 25% of vehicle

braking power) if necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is aboutapproximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

WARNING

O This system is only an aid to assistthe driver and is not a collisionwarning or avoidance device. It isthe driver’s responsibility to stayalert, drive safely and be in con-trol of the vehicle at all times.

O The system is primarily intendedfor use on straight, dry, openroads with light traffic. It is notadvisable to use the system incity traffic or congested areas.

O This system will not adapt auto-matically to road conditions. Thissystem should be used in evenly

flowing traffic. Do not use thesystem on roads with sharpcurves, or on icy roads, in heavyrain or in fog.

The distance sensor will not detect:

O Stationary and slow moving vehicles

O Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

O Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

O Motorcycles or scooters traveling offset inthe travel lane

This system will not automatically brakethe vehicle to a stop.

The system will cancel and a warning buzzerwill sound if the speed falls below approxi-mately 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also, the systemwill be disengaged below the 20 MPH (32km/h) cut-off speed or over the maximum setspeed.


5-19

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

The following items are controlled when theselector lever is in the D (Drive) position.

O When there are no vehicles ahead, thevehicle with this system maintains thespeed set by the driver. The driver can setthe speed between approximately 25 and90 MPH (40 and 144 km/h).

O When there is a vehicle ahead, the ICCsystem changes vehicle speed betweenapproximately 20 MPH (32 km/h) and theset speed to match the speed of the vehicleahead and maintain the driver selecteddistance between vehicles.

O When the vehicle ahead disappears, thevehicle with this system accelerates up toand maintains the set speed.

WARNING

O As there is a performance limit to

the distance control function,never rely solely on the Intelli-gent Cruise Control system. Thissystem does not correct careless,inattentive or absent-mindeddriving, or overcome poor visibil-ity in rain, fog, or other badweather. Decelerate the vehiclespeed by depressing the brakepedal, depending on the distanceto the vehicle ahead and the sur-rounding circumstances in orderto maintain a safe distance be-tween vehicles.

O Although the brake operation iscontrolled by the system, the sys-tem does not automatically stopthe vehicle. If the vehicle speedfalls below approximately 20MPH (32 km/h), the IntelligentCruise Control system is auto-

matically canceled and a warningbuzzer sounds. (The brake controlis also canceled.)

O The system may not detect thevehicle in front of you in certainroad or weather conditions. Toavoid accidents, never use theIntelligent Cruise Control systemunder the following conditions:

— On roads where the traffic isheavy or there are sharpcurves

— On slippery road surfacessuch as on ice or snow, etc.

— During bad weather (rain,fog, snow, etc.)(When the windshield wiperis operated at the low speed(LO) or high speed (HI) posi-


5-20

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

tions, the Intelligent CruiseControl system is automati-cally canceled.)

— When strong light (for ex-ample, at sunrise or sunset)is directly shining on thefront of the vehicle.

— When rain, snow or dirt ad-here to the system sensor.

— On steep downhill roads (thevehicle may go beyond theset vehicle speed and fre-quent braking may result inoverheating the brakes).

— On repeated uphill and down-hill roads.

— When traffic conditions makeit difficult to keep a proper

distance between vehiclesbecause of frequent accel-eration or deceleration.

DRIVING WITH INTELLIGENTCRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

Always pay attention to the operation of thevehicle and be ready to manually control theproper following distance. The IntelligentCruise Control (ICC) system may not be ableto maintain the selected distance between

vehicles (following distance) or selected ve-hicle speed under some circumstances.

The ICC system uses a sensor located on thefront of the vehicle to detect vehicles ahead.The sensor mainly detects the signals returnedfrom the reflectors on a vehicle ahead. TheICC system may not be able to maintain theselected distance if the sensor cannot detectthe reflector from the vehicle ahead when:

O the reflector is positioned high on thevehicle (trailer, etc.).

O the reflector is covered with dirt, snow androad spray.

O snow or road spray from other vehiclesreduces the sensor’s visibility.

O dense exhaust or other smoke (blacksmoke) from other vehicles reduces thesensor’s visibility.

O if the reflector on the vehicle ahead ismissing, damaged or covered.

SIS0078


5-21

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O if excessively heavy baggage is loaded inthe rear seat or the cargo area of yourvehicle.

The ICC system is designed to automaticallydetect when the sensor is dirty or obstructed.If dirt is detected on the sensor, the system isautomatically canceled. If the sensor is cov-ered with ice, a transparent or translucentvinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detectthem. If so, the ICC system may not canceland may not be able to maintain the selectedfollowing distance. Clean the sensor regularly.

The ICC system is designed to maintain aselected distance and match the speed of aslower vehicle ahead; the system deceleratesthe vehicle as necessary. However, the ICCsystem can only apply up to 25% of thevehicles total braking power. Because of this,the ICC system should only be used whentraffic conditions allow vehicle speeds toremain fairly constant or vehicle speedschange gradually. If a vehicle moves into the

lane ahead or if a vehicle ahead rapidlydecelerates, the distance between vehiclesmay become closer because the ICC systemcannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough.If this occurs, the ICC system will sound awarning buzzer and blink the system displayto notify the driver to take necessary action.Refer to “Approach warning” later in thissection.

The ICC system does not control vehiclespeed or warm you when you approachstationary and slow moving vehicles. Youmust pay attention to vehicle operation tomaintain proper distance from vehicles aheadwhen approaching toll gates or traffic jams.


5-22

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

The detection zone of the ICC sensor islimited. A vehicle ahead must be in thedetection zone for the ICC to maintain theselected distance and to match the speed of avehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may be outside the detectionzone due to its position in the lane. Motor-cycles and scooters may not be detected in thelane ahead if they are traveling offset from thecenterline of the lane. A vehicle that ischanging lanes ahead may be outside thedetection zone until it is almost completely in

the lane. If this occurs, the ICC system maywarn you by blinking the system indicator andsounding the buzzer. The driver may have tomanually control the proper following dis-tance.

SIS0096


5-23

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

When driving on some roads, the ICC sensormay detect vehicles in a different lane, or maytemporarily not detect a vehicle ahead. Thismay cause the ICC system to decelerate oraccelerate the vehicle. These conditions couldhappen on winding roads, hilly roads, enter-ing or exiting a curve, narrow roads or in roadconstruction areas. Additionally, the detectionof vehicles can be affected by the vehicleoperation (steering maneuver or driving posi-tion in the lane) or the traffic condition (forexample, if a vehicle ahead is being drivenwith some damage). The ICC system indicator

and buzzer may warn you unexpectedly. Youwill then have to manually control the properdistance ahead of your vehicle.

If you are driving on the freeway at a set speedand come upon a slower vehicle ahead, theICC will attempt to match that vehicle’s speedand maintain a selected following distance. Ifthe vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits thefreeway, the ICC system will accelerate thevehicle to match the set speed. Pay attentionto the driving operation to maintain control ofthe vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed onwinding or hilly roads. If this happens, drivewithout the ICC system.

SIS0097 SIS0098


5-24

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CON-TROL SWITCH

The system is operated by a master ON/OFFswitch and four control switches, all mountedon the steering wheel.

1. ON/OFF switch:Master switch to activate the system

2. COAST/SET switch:Sets desired cruise speed, reduces speedincrementally.

3. ACCELERATE/RESUME switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speedincrementally.

4. CANCEL switch:Deactivates system without erasing setspeed.

5. DISTANCE switch:Changes the following distance from;Maximum, Intermediate, Minimum.

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CON-TROL SYSTEM DISPLAY

The display is located under the tachometer.

1. Intelligent Cruise Control system warninglight (Orange)

The light comes on if there is a malfunction inthe ICC system.

2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in frontof you.

SIS0069

SIS0070


5-25

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

3. Set distance indicator

Displays the selected distance between ve-hicles set with the DISTANCE switch.

4. Indicates your vehicle

5. ON/OFF switch indicator light (Green)

Indicates that the ON/OFF switch is ON.

6. Set vehicle speed indicator

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed will beindicated by km/h.

When the key switch is turned ON, the displaycomes on as follows to check for a burned-outbulb, and it turns off when the engine isstarted.

OPERATING INTELLIGENTCRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

To turn on the cruise control, push theON/OFF switch on. The cruise indicator light,set distance indicator and set vehicle speed in-dicator come on, and they are on a standbystate for setting.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-hicle to the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it. (Vehicleahead detection indicator, set distance indica-tor and set vehicle speed indicator come on.)Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Yourvehicle will maintain the set speed.

SIS0071

SIS0072

SIS0073


5-26

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

The Intelligent Cruise Control system cannotbe set under the following conditions even ifthe COAST/SET switch is pushed.

O When traveling outside the 25 to 90 MPH(40 to 144 km/h) speed range

O When the selector lever is not in the D(Drive) position

O While the vehicle is being braked by thedriver

O When pressing the ACCEL/RES switchwithout there being a set speed in memory

O When the windshield wipers are switchedto Low or High

O When the parking brake is applied.

System operation

WARNING

Normally when controlling the dis-tance to a vehicle ahead, this systemautomatically accelerates or decel-erates your vehicle according to thespeed of the vehicle ahead. Depressthe accelerator or brake pedal, how-ever, to properly accelerate or decel-

erate your vehicle when accelerationis required for a lane change or whendeceleration is required to maintaina safe distance to the vehicle aheaddue to its sudden deceleration or if avehicle cuts in.

The driver sets the desired vehicle speedbased on the road conditions. The ICC systemmaintains the set vehicle speed, similar to

SIS0074


5-27

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

standard cruise control, as long as no vehicleis detected in the lane ahead.

The ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead :

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead,the ICC system decelerates the vehicle bycontrolling the throttle and applying thebrakes to match the speed of a slower vehicleahead. The system then controls the vehiclespeed based on the speed of the vehicle aheadto maintain a driver selected distance.

The stoplights of the vehicle come onand the brake pedal depresses whenbraking is performed by the ICC system.

CAUTION

Never place your foot under the brakepedal. When the brake is operated bythe Intelligent Cruise Control system,

you may get your foot caught in thepedal.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicleahead detection indicator comes on. The ICCsystem will also display the set speed andselected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected :

When a vehicle is not longer detected ahead,the ICC system gradually accelerates yourvehicle to resume the previously set vehiclespeed. The ICC system then maintains the setspeed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected thevehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.

If a vehicle ahead appears during accelerationto the set vehicle speed or any time the ICCsystem is in operation, the system recontrolsthe distance to the vehicle.

To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal and steer the vehicle around thevehicle ahead. The set speed indicator willflash when the vehicle speed exceeds the setspeed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn offwhen the area ahead of the vehicle is open.When the pedal is released, the vehicle will re-turn to the previously set speed.

Although your vehicle may be at the setvehicle speed based on ICC system control,depress the accelerator pedal when it isnecessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

SIS0075


5-28

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

HOW TO CHANGE THE SETVEHICLE SPEED

To cancel the preset speed, use any ofthese methods:

O Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehiclespeed indicator will go out.

O Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speedindicator will go out.

O Turn the ON/OFF switch off. Both theON/OFF switch indicator and set vehiclespeed indicator will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, useone of the following methods:

O Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

O Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. Theset vehicle speed will increase by approxi-mately 5 MPH (5 km/h for Canada).

O Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RESswitch. Each time you do this, the setspeed will increase by approximately 1MPH (1 km/h for Canada).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following methods:

O Lightly tap the brake pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

O Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Theset vehicle speed will decrease by approxi-mately 5 MPH (5 km/h for Canada).

O Push, then quickly release the COAST/SETswitch. Each time you do this, the setspeed will decrease by approximately 1MPH (1 km/h for Canada).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle willresume the last set cruising speed when the ve-hicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

HOW TO CHANGE THE SETDISTANCE TO THE VEHICLEAHEADThe distance to the vehicle ahead can beselected at any time depending on the trafficconditions.

Each time the DISTANCE switch is pressed,the set distance will change to long, medium,short and back to long again in that sequence.


5-29

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O The distance to the vehicle ahead willchange according to the vehicle speed.

The higher the vehicle speed, the longerthe distance.

O If the engine is stopped, the set distance

SIS0076

SIS0077


5-30

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

becomes “long”. (Each time the engine isstarted, the initial setting becomes long.)

APPROACH WARNING

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicleahead due to large deceleration of that vehicleor if another vehicle cuts in, the system warnsthe driver with the buzzer and ICC systemdisplay. Decelerate by depressing the brakepedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:

• The buzzer sounds.

• The vehicle ahead detection and setdistance indicator blink.

WARNING

Do not use the Intelligent Cruise Con-trol system when traffic conditionscause the buzzer to sound frequently.

The warning buzzer may not sound in some

cases when there is a short distance betweenvehicles. Some examples are:

O When the vehicles are traveling at thesame speed and the distance betweenvehicles is not changing.

O When the vehicle ahead is traveling fasterand the distance between vehicles is in-creasing.

O When the accelerator pedal is depressed,overriding the system.

O When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.

The warning buzzer will not sound when yourvehicle approaches vehicles that are parked ormoving slowly.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may soundand the system display may blink whenthe ICC sensor detects some reflectorswhich are fitted on vehicles in otherlanes or on the side of the road. Thismay cause the ICC system to decelerateor accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sen-sor may detect these reflectors when thevehicle is driven on winding roads, hillyroads or when entering or exiting acurve. The ICC sensor may also detect

SIS0101


5-31

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

reflectors on narrow roads or in roadconstruction zones. In these cases youwill have to manually control the properdistance ahead of your vehicle. Also,the sensor sensitivity can be affected bythe vehicle operation (steering maneu-ver or driving position in the lane) ortraffic conditions (for example, if a ve-hicle is being driven with some dam-age).

AUTOMATIC CANCELLATIONA buzzer sounds under the following condi-tions and the control is automatically can-celed.

O When the vehicle speed is outside 20 to 90MPH (32 to 144 km/h)

O When the selector lever is shifted to aposition other than D (Drive)

O When the wiper is operated at low speed(LO) or high speed (HI) (in the intermittent(INT) position, the control is not canceled)

O When the parking brake is applied

WARNING INDICATOR

Condition A

The buzzer sounds and the intelligent cruisecontrol system is canceled automatically inthe conditions described below. Part of thesystem display will come on or blink, makingit impossible to set.

O When the ABS is in operation

O When a tire slips

O When strong light (sunlight, etc.) is di-rectly shining on the front of the vehicle

Action to take

When the conditions listed above are nolonger present, turn the system off using theIntelligent Cruise Control ON/OFF Switch.Turn the ICC system back on to use thesystem.

Condition B

When the sensor window is dirty, making itimpossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the ICC

SIS0088

SIS0091


5-32

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

system is automatically canceled.

The buzzer sounds and the system warninglight (Orange) will come on and the setdistance indicators will blink.

Action to takeIf the warning light comes on, park the vehiclein a safe place and turn the engine off. Cleanthe dirty parts with a soft cloth and thenperform the settings again.

Condition C

When the ICC system is not operating prop-erly, the buzzer sounds and the systemwarning light (Orange) will come on.

Action to takeIf the warning light comes on, park the vehiclein a safe place. Turn the engine off and thenperform the settings again.

If it is not possible to set or if the indi-cator stays on, it may indicate that thesystem is malfunctioning. Although thevehicle is still driveable under normalconditions, have the vehicle checked atan authorized INFINITI retailer.

HOW TO HANDLE THE SEN-SOR

The sensor for the ICC system is locatedbelow the front bumper.

To keep the ICC system operating properly,be sure to observe the following:

O Always keep the sensor clean.Wipe dirty parts with a soft cloth carefullyso as not to damage them.

O Do not impact the areas around the sen-sor. Do not touch or disassemble the

SIS0100

SIS0078


5-33

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

screw located on the sensor. Doing socould cause failure or malfunction. If thesensor installation part is deformed due toan accident, contact an authorized INFINITIretailer.

O Do not attach a sticker (including trans-parent material) or install an accessorynear the sensor. This could cause failureor malfunction.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULEDuring the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), followthese recommendations to obtain maximumengine performance and ensure the future re-liability and economy of your new vehicle. Fail-ure to follow these recommendations may re-sult in shortened engine life and reduced en-gine performance.

O Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow. Do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

O Do not accelerate at full throttle in anygear.

O Avoid quick starts.

O Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

O Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km).

INCREASING FUELECONOMYO Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain

cruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

O Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

O Driving at high speeds will lower fueleconomy.

O Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles.

O Select a gear range suitable to road con-ditions.

O Avoid unnecessary prolonged engineidling.

O Keep your engine tuned up.

O Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

O Keep the tires inflated at the correct pres-sure. Improper tire pressure will increasewear and waste fuel.

O Make sure the front wheels are properlyaligned. Improper alignment will causepremature tire wear and lower fueleconomy.

O Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner onlywhen necessary.

O When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

O Use 4H position only when necessary. 4Hoperation lowers fuel economy.


5-34

Z 02.9.12/JR50-D X

USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE(4WD)

CAUTION

O Do not drive the vehicle in the 4Hor 4LO position on dry hard sur-face roads.

If the 4WD warning light turns onwhen you are driving on dry hardsurface roads

O In the AUTO or 4H position,shift the 4WD shift switch to2WD.

O In the 4LO position, stop thevehicle, move the automatictransmission lever to the Nposition, and shift the 4WDshift switch to 2WD.

Have your vehicle checked by anauthorized INFINITI retailer as soonas possible.

TRANSFER CASE SHIFTINGPROCEDURESAll mode 4WD system provides 4 positions(AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can selectthe desired drive mode according to thedriving conditions.

2WD or 4WD shift procedure


5-35

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SIS0053A


5-36

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

*1: O The transfer 4LO position indicatorlight may blink. Stop the vehicle. Besure to shift the 4WD shift switchafter the automatic transmission leverhas been shifted to the N position. Ifthe indicator light keeps blinking afterthe 4WD shift procedure in the pre-vious page, drive slowly withoutabrupt maneuvers for a while. Thenthe light will turn on or off.

O Avoid making a turn or abrupt startswhile shifting to 4LO. Otherwisegears may grind, damaging the drivesystem.

*2: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indi-cator light turns on when you shift the4WD shift switch to 4LO.

The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used toselect either 2WD or 4WD depending on thedriving conditions. There are four types ofdrive modes available, AUTO, 2WD, 4H and4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controlsthe transfer case operation. Rotate the switchto move between each mode, 2WD, AUTO, 4Hand 4LO.

You must push the switch in to select4LO, and the vehicle MUST be station-ary and the automatic transmission se-lector lever is in the N position whenchanging into or out of 4LO.

WARNING

When parking, apply the parkingbrake before stopping the engine andmake sure that the 4WD shift indica-tor light is on and the ATP warninglight goes off. Otherwise, the vehiclecould unexpectedly move even if theautomatic transmission is in the Pposition.

CAUTION

O Never shift the 4WD shift switchbetween 4LO and 4H while driving.

O The 4H position provides greaterpower and traction. Avoid exces-sive speed, as it will cause in-creased fuel consumption andhigher oil temperatures, andcould damage drivetrain compo-nents. Speed over 80 km/h (50MPH) in 4H is not recommend.

O The 4LO position provides maxi-mum power and traction. Avoidraising vehicle speed exces-sively, as the maximum speed isapproximately 50 km/h (30 MPH).

O When driving straight, shift the4WD shift switch to the 2WD,AUTO or 4H position. Do not move


5-37

Z 02.6.26/JR50-D X

the 4WD shift switch when mak-ing a turn or reversing.

O Do not shift the 4WD shift switch(between 2WD, AUTO and 4H)while driving on steep downhillgrades. Use the engine brake andlow automatic transmission gears(D1 or D2) for engine braking.

O Do not operate the 4WD shiftswitch (between 2WD, AUTO and4H) with the rear wheels spin-ning.

O Do not drive on dry hard surfaceroads in the 4H or 4LO position.Driving on dry hard surfaces in 4Hor 4LO may cause unnecessarynoise and tire wear. We recom-mend driving in the 2WD or AUTOposition under these conditions.

O Vehicles equipped with a limitedslip differential (LSD) have im-proved driving performance onrough roads. They have increasedtraction performance, so whenmaking a turn on paved roads,vibration and tire squealing mayoccur.

O The 4WD transfer case may notbe shifted between 4H and 4LO atlow ambient temperatures andthe transfer 4LO position indica-tor light may blink even when the4WD shift switch is shifted. Afterdriving for a while you canchange the 4WD transfer casebetween 4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,

O Set the 4WD shift switch to AUTO, 4H or4LO.

O Drive carefully according to the road sur-face conditions.

When the vehicle is stuck,

O Place stones or wooden blocks under thetires to free the vehicle.

O Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

O If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeatforward and backward movement to in-crease the movement.

O If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tirechains may be effective.

CAUTION

O Do not increase the tire rotationexcessively. Tires will sink deepinto the mud, making it difficult tofree the vehicle.

O Avoid shifting gears with the en-


5-38

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

gine running at high speeds asthis may cause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operationsO Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the

2WD, AUTO, 4H or 4LO position, depend-ing on driving conditions.

O With the switch set to the AUTO position,distribution of torque to the front and rearwheels changes automatically, dependingon road conditions encountered [ratio; 0 :

100 (2WD) → 50 : 50 (4WD)]. Thisresults in improved driving stability.

O If the 4WD shift switch is operatedwhile making a turn, accelerating ordecelerating or if the key switch isturned off while in the AUTO, 4H or4LO, you may feel a jerk. This is notabnormal.

O When the vehicle is stopped aftermaking a turn, you may feel a slightjolt after the selector lever is shiftedto N or P. This occurs because thetransfer clutch is released and notbecause of a malfunction.

CAUTION

O When driving straight, shift the4WD shift switch to the 2WD,AUTO, or 4H position. Do not move

the 4WD shift switch when mak-ing a turn or reversing.

O Do not shift the 4WD shift switchwhile driving on steep downhillgrades. Use the engine brake andlow automatic transmission gears(D1 or D2) for engine braking.

O Do not operate the 4WD shiftswitch with the rear wheels spin-ning.

O Before placing the 4WD shiftswitch in the 4H position from2WD or AUTO, ensure the vehiclespeed is less than 50 MPH (80km/h). Failure to do so can dam-age the 4WD system.

O Never shift the 4WD shift switchbetween 4LO and 4H whiledriving.

SIS0046A


5-39

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O Engine idling speed is high whilewarming up the engine. Be espe-cially careful when starting ordriving on slippery surfaces withthe 4WD shift switch set in AUTO.

4WD shift indicator light

The 4WD shift indicator light is located in thetachometer.


While the engine is running, the 4WD shiftindicator light will illuminate the positionselected by the 4WD shift switch.

O The 4WD shift indicator light mayblink while shifting from one drivemode to the other. When the shiftingis completed, the 4WD shift indicatorlight will come on. If the indicatorlight does not come on immediately,make sure the area around the ve-hicle is safe, and drive the vehiclestraight, accelerate or decelerate ormove the vehicle in reverse, thenshift the 4WD shift switch.

O If the 4WD warning light comes on, the4WD indicator light goes out.

CAUTION

O When the 4WD shift switch is

turned to the AUTO position at lowambient temperatures, the 4WDshift indicator light may show 4H.If this happens, all four wheelsare driven as torque distributionis in the 4H position. Be carefulas the vehicle may become diffi-cult to turn. When the vehicle isdriven, the 4WD shift indicatorlight should change to AUTO.

O If the 4WD shift indicator lightindication changes to 2WD whenthe 4WD shift switch is shifted tothe AUTO or 4H position at lowambient temperatures, the 2WDmode may be being engaged dueto malfunctioning drive system. Ifthe indicator does not return tonormal and the 4WD warninglight comes on, have the system

SIS0027


5-40

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

checked by the nearest INFINITIretailer.

4WD warning light The 4WD warning light is located in themeter.

If the transfer shift lever is set in the Nposition, the 4WD warning light may illumi-nate. When this occurs, move the 4WD shiftswitch to the 4H or 4LO position.

The 4WD warning light comes on when thekey switch is turned to ON. It turns off soonafter the engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD systemwhen the key switch is ON, the warning lightwill either remain illuminated or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WDshift indicator light goes out.

High-temperature transfer case oil makes thewarning light blink rapidly (about twice persecond). If the warning light blinks rapidlyduring operation, stop the vehicle in a safeplace immediately. Then if the light goes offafter a while, you can continue driving.

SIS0028A


5-41

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

A large difference between the diameters offront and rear wheels will make the warninglight blink slowly (about once per two sec-onds). Change the 4WD shift switch into 2WDand do not drive fast.

CAUTION

O If the warning light comes on orblinks slowly during operation orrapidly after stopping the vehiclefor a while, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized INFINITIretailer as soon as possible.

O Shifting between 4H and 4LO isnot recommended when the 4WDwarning light turns on.

O When the warning light comeson, the 2WD mode may be en-gaged even if the 4WD shift

switch is in AUTO or 4H. Be es-pecially careful when driving. Ifcorresponding parts are malfunc-tioning, the 4WD mode will not beengaged even if the 4WD shiftswitch is shifted.

O Do not drive on dry hard surfaceroads in the 4H or 4LO position.

If the 4WD warning light turns onwhen you are driving on dry hardsurface roads

O in the AUTO or 4H position,shift the 4WD shift switch to2WD.

O in the 4LO position, stop thevehicle, move the automatictransmission lever to the Nposition, and shift the 4WDshift switch to 2WD.

O If the warning light is still on afterthe above operation, have yourvehicle checked by an authorizedINFINITI retailer as soon as pos-sible.

O The transfer case may be dam-aged if you continue driving withthe warning light blinking rapidly.


5-42

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

PARKING/PARKING ONHILLS

WARNING

O Do not stop or park the vehicleover flammable materials such asdry grass, waste paper or rags.They may ignite and cause a fire.

O Never leave children unattended

in the vehicle.

O Never leave the engine runningwhile the vehicle is unattended.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake (handbrake).

2. Move the automatic transmission selectlever to the P (Park) position.

WARNING

O Safe parking procedures requirethat both the parking brake be setand the transmission placed into P(Park). Failure to do so couldcause the vehicle to move unex-pectedly or roll away and result inan accident.

O Make sure the select lever hasbeen pushed as far forward as itcan go and cannot be moved with-out depressing the button at theend of the lever.

All-mode 4WD models:

O If the ATP light is ON, this indi-cates that the automatic trans-mission P (park) position will notfunction and the transfer case is

SIS0029


5-43

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

in neutral. Make sure that the4WD shift indicator light (andtransfer 4LO position indicator)light remains illuminated beforestopping the engine. Otherwise,the vehicle could unexpectedlymove even if the automatic trans-mission is in the P (park) posi-tion.

O Failure to engage the transfercase in 4H or 4LO could result inthe vehicle moving unexpectedly,resulting in serious personal in-jury or property damage.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rollinginto the street when parked on a slopingdrive way, it is a good practice to turn thewheels as illustrated.

O HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: j1

Turn the wheels into the curb and move

the vehicle forward until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

O HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: j2

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

O HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: j3

Turn the wheels toward the side of theroad so the vehicle will move away fromthe center of the road if it moves.

Make sure the ATP light is off beforestopping the engine.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key.

WARNING

When parking, apply the parking

brake before stopping the engineand make sure that the 4WD shiftindicator light is (and transfer 4LOposition indicator light are) on. Oth-erwise, the vehicle could unexpect-edly move even if the automatictransmission is in the P position.

POWER STEERINGThe power assisted steering is designed touse a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, toassist steering.

If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, espe-cially in sharp turns or at low speeds.


5-44

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WARNING

If the engine is not running or isturned off while driving, the powerassist for the steering will not work.Steering will be much harder to op-erate.

BRAKE SYSTEMThe brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you willstill have braking at two wheels.

Vacuum assisted brake

The brake booster aids braking by usingengine vacuum. If the engine stops, you canstop the vehicle by depressing the brakepedal. However, greater foot pressure on thebrake pedal will be required to stop the vehicleand the stopping distance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving. This will overheat the brakes,wear out the brake linings and pads faster andreduce gas mileage.

To help save the brakes and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, before going down aslope or long grade, reduce speed and down-shift to a lower gear.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result,your braking distance will be longer and thevehicle may pull to one side during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakesreturn to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle athigh speeds until the brakes function cor-rectly.

WARNING

O While driving on a slippery sur-face, be careful when braking, ac-celerating or downshifting. Abruptbraking or accelerating couldcause the wheels to skid and re-sult in an accident.

O If the engine is not running or isturned off while driving, thepower assist for the brakes willnot work. Braking will be harder.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakesat each wheel so the wheels will not lock whenbraking abruptly or when braking on slipperysurfaces. The system detects the rotationspeed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid


5-45

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

pressure to prevent each wheel from locking.By preventing wheel lockup, the system helpsthe driver maintain steering control and helpsto minimize swerving and spinning on slip-pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal.

Doing so may result in increasedstopping distances.

Normal operation

The anti-lock brake system will not operate atspeeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) tocompletely stop the vehicle. (The speeds willvary according to road conditions.) When theanti-lock system senses that one or more

wheels are close to locking up, the actuator(under the hood) rapidly applies and releaseshydraulic pressure (like pumping the brakesvery quickly). While the actuator is working,you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedaland hear a noise or vibration from the actuatorunder the hood. This is normal and indicatesthat the anti-lock system is working properly.However, the pulsation may indicate that roadconditions are hazardous and extra care isrequired while driving.

If a tire slips on rough roads for morethan 10 seconds, the ABS brake warninglight may come on. Turn OFF the ignitionkey, restart the engine and drive the ve-hicle at speeds above 20 MPH (30km/h). If the warning light does not goout, have the vehicle checked at anINFINITI retailer.

Self-test feature

The anti-lock brake system consists of elec-

tronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulicsolenoids controlled by a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic feature thattests the system each time you start the engineand move the vehicle at a low speed inforward or reverse. When the self-test occurs,you may hear a clank noise and/or feel apulsation in the brake pedal. This is normaland is not an indication of any malfunction. Ifthe computer senses any malfunction, itswitches the anti-lock brake system OFF andturns on the ABS brake warning light in thedashboard. The brake system will then behavenormally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If the light comes on during the self check, orwhile you are driving, you should take yourvehicle to your INFINITI retailer for repair atyour earliest convenience.


5-46

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WARNING

The anti-lock brake system is a so-phisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from care-less or dangerous driving tech-niques. It can help maintain vehiclecontrol during braking on slipperysurfaces, but remember that thestopping distance on slippery sur-faces will be longer than on normalsurfaces, even with the anti-lock sys-tem. Stopping distances may also belonger on rough, gravel or snow cov-ered roads, or if you are using tirechains. Always maintain a safe dis-tance from the vehicle in front of you.Ultimately, the responsibility forsafety of self and others rests in thehands of the driver.

Tire type and condition of tires mayalso affect braking effectiveness.

O When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

O When installing a spare tire,make sure it is the proper sizeand type as specified on the tireplacard. See “Tire placard” in the“10. Technical and consumer in-formation” section for tire plac-ard location information.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

FREEING A FROZEN DOORLOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, applyde-icer or glycerin through the key hole. If thelock becomes frozen, heat the key beforeinserting it into the key hole.

ANTI-FREEZE

When it is anticipated that the temperature willdrop below 32°F (0°C), check the anti-freezeto assure proper winter protection. For details,see “Engine cooling system” in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged duringextremely cold weather conditions, the batteryfluid may freeze and damage the battery. Tomaintain maximum efficiency, the batteryshould be checked regularly. For details, see“Battery” in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WA-TER

If the vehicle is to be left outside withoutanti-freeze, drain the cooling system by open-ing the drain valves located under the radiatorand on the engine block. Refill before oper-ating the vehicle. See “Engine cooling system”


5-47

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section for changingengine coolant.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate yourvehicle on snowy or icy roads, INFINITIrecommends the use of MUD & SNOW orALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.Please consult your INFINITI retailer forthe tire type, size, speed rating and avail-ability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, stud-ded tires may be used. However, someprovinces and states prohibit their use.Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may

be poorer than that of non-studded snowtires.

3. Tire chains may be used if desired. Makesure they are of proper size for the tires onyour vehicle and are installed according tothe chain manufacturer’s suggestions.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord-ing to location. Check the local laws beforeinstalling tire chains. When installing tirechains, make sure they are of proper size forthe tires on your vehicle and are installedaccording to the chain manufacturer’s sugges-tions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Class“S” chains are used on vehicles with restrictedtire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can useClass “S” chains are designed to meet theSAE standard minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are deter-mined using the factory equipped tire size.

Other types may damage your vehicle. Usechain tensioners when recommended by thetire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit.Loose end links of the tire chain must besecured or removed to prevent the possibilityof whipping action damage to the fenders orunderbody. If possible, avoid fully loadingyour vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, yourvehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle han-dling and performance may be adverselyaffected.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not drive with tire chains on paved roadswhich are clear of snow. Driving with chainsin such conditions can cause damage to thevarious mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress. When driving on clear pavedroads, be sure to change to 2WD.


5-48

Z 02.9.12/JR50-D X

Four wheel driveIf you install snow tires, they must also be thesame size, brand, construction and treadpattern on all four wheels.

CAUTION

ONLY use spare tires specified foreach four wheel drive model.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENTIt is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:O A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-

move ice and snow from the windows andwiper blades.

O A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

O A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-drifts.

O Extra window washer fluid to refill thereservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

O Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezingrain), very cold snow or ice can beslick and very hard to drive on. Thevehicle will have a lot less tractionor grip under these conditions. Tryto avoid driving on wet ice until theroad is salted or sanded.

O Whatever the condition, drivewith caution. Accelerate and slowdown with care. If accelerating ordownshifting too fast, the drivewheels will lose even more trac-tion.

O Allow more stopping distance un-der these conditions. Brakingshould be started sooner than on

dry pavement.

O Allow greater following distanceson slippery roads.

O Watch for slippery spots (glareice). These may appear on anotherwise clear road in shadedareas. If a patch of ice is seenahead, brake before reaching it.Try not to brake while actually onthe ice, and avoid any suddensteering maneuvers.

O Do not use cruise control on slip-pery roads.

O Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keepsnow clear of the exhaust pipeand from around your vehicle.


5-49

Z 02.9.12/JR50-D X

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)An engine block heater to assist extreme coldtemperature starting is available through yourINFINITI retailer.

WARNING

Do not use your heater with an un-grounded electrical system or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. You canbe injured by an electrical shock ifyou use an ungrounded connection.


5-50

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Roadside assistance program ..................... 6-2Flat tire ........................................................ 6-2

Changing a flat tire ................................ 6-2Jump starting .............................................. 6-8Push starting ............................................... 6-9

If your vehicle overheats........................... 6-10Towing your vehicle .................................. 6-11

Towing recommended by INFINITI ...... 6-12Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuckvehicle) ................................................. 6-14

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCEPROGRAMEvery new INFINITI comes with a 4 year,unlimited mileage Roadside Assistance plan.In the event of a roadside emergency, Road-side Assistance Service is available to you.Please refer to your Warranty Booklet fordetails. Both the Warranty Booklet and Road-side Assistance Calling Card in your Owner’sLiterature Portfolio provide the Toll-FreeNumber to call for assistance. Roadside As-sistance is provided 24 hours a day, 365 daysa year, for four years from the date sold to giveemergency roadside help, in the event ofmechanical or nonmechanical trouble(s) suchas flat tires, out-of-gas, dead battery, lost keysmechanical breakdown, accident, etc.

FLAT TIRECHANGING A FLAT TIREIf you have a flat tire, follow the instructionsbelow.

Stopping the vehicle1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply theparking brake. Shift the automatic trans-mission to P (Park).

WARNING

Make sure the 4WD shift indicatorand/or transfer 4LO position indicatorlight remains illuminated beforestopping the engine.

Make sure the ATP light is off beforestopping the engine. Otherwise, thevehicle could roll unexpectedly evenif the automatic transmission is inthe P position. This could result inserious personal injury or property

damage.

4. Turn off the engine.

WARNING

O Make sure the parking brake is se-curely applied and the automatictransmission is shifted into P(Park).

O Never change tires when the ve-hicle is on a slope, ice or slipperyareas. This is hazardous.

O Never change tires if oncomingtraffic is close to your vehicle.Wait for professional roadassistance.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and tosignal professional road assistance per-

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

6-2

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

sonnel that you need help.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.Please refer to your Warranty Booklet orRoadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-freenumber to call.

Blocking wheels

Stop the engine and pull the parking brakelever all the way on.

Place suitable blocks at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flattire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when itis jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the ve-hicle may move and cause personalinjury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools and spare tire fromstorage area.

SIE0022

SIE0020A

SIE0055


6-3

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CAUTION

O Do not insert the jack rod straightas it is designed to be inserted atan angle as shown.

O Make sure the rod tip fits in thefitting portion of the spare tirehanger and turn the rod.

O Be sure to center the spare tiresuspending plate on the wheeland then lift the spare tire.

Removing wheel cap

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps. Doing so could result in per-sonal injury.

SIE0021

SIE0061


6-4

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Jacking up the vehicle and re-moving the damaged tire

SIE0050

SIE0051

SIE0054B


6-5

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WARNING

O Never get under the vehicle whileit is supported only by the jack.

O Use only the jack provided withyour vehicle to lift the vehicle. Donot use the jack provided withyour vehicle on other vehicles.The jack is designed only for lift-ing your vehicle during a tirechange.

O Use the correct jack up points;never use any other part of thevehicle for jack support.

O Never jack up the vehicle morethan necessary.

O Never use blocks on or under thejack.

O Do not start or run engine whilevehicle is on the jack, as it maycause the vehicle to move. This isespecially true for vehicles withlimited slip differential carriers.

O Do not allow passengers to stayin the vehicle while it is on thejack.

Carefully read the following instruc-tions.

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint.

The jack should be used on level firmground.

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheelnut wrench.

Do not remove the wheel nuts until the

tire is off the ground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tireclears the ground. To lift the vehicle,securely hold the jack lever and rod withboth hands as shown above. Remove thewheel nuts, and then remove the wheel. Donot remove the brake drum with the wheel.

Installing the spare tire

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surfacebetween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten the

SIE0025


6-6

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly until they aretight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts se-curely in the sequence as illustrated.

WARNING

O Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can causethe wheel to become loose orcome off. This could cause an ac-cident.

O Do not use oil or grease on thewheel studs or nuts. This couldcause the nuts to become loose.

As soon as possible tighten the wheel

nuts to the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:98 ft-lb (133 Nzm)

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-sure.

COLD pressure:

After vehicle has been parked for threehours or more or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on thetire placard affixed to the glove box lid.

WARNING

Retighten the wheel nuts when thevehicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flattire, etc.).

5. Securely store the spare tire and jackingequipment in the vehicle.

When storing the 17 inch wheel, remove thecap pushing it from the inside of the wheel.

WARNING

Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properlysecured after use. Such items can be-come dangerous projectiles in an ac-cident or sudden stop.

JUMP STARTINGIf you try to start your engine with a boosterbattery, follow the instructions and precau-tions below:

WARNING

O If done incorrectly, jump starting


6-7

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

can lead to a battery explosion,resulting in severe injury ordeath. It could also damage yourvehicle.

O Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the bat-tery. Keep all sparks and flamesaway from it.

O Do not allow battery fluid to comeinto contact with eyes, skin, clothor painted surfaces. Battery fluidis a corrosive sulphuric acid so-lution which can cause severeburns. If the fluid should comeinto contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted areawith water.

O Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

O The booster battery must be ratedat 12 volts. Use of an improperlyrated battery can damage yourvehicle.

O Whenever working on or near abattery, always wear suitable eyeprotectors (for example, gogglesor industrial safety spectacles)and remove rings, metal bands,or any other jewelry. Do not leanover battery when jump starting.

O Do not attempt to jump start afrozen battery. It could explodeand cause serious injury.

O Your vehicle has an automaticengine cooling fan. It could comeon at any time. Keep hands andother objects away from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in dam-age to the charging system and causepersonal injury.

1. Position the two vehicles to bring theirbatteries into close proximity to each otherif the booster battery is in another vehicle.

SIE0062


6-8

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Do not allow the two vehicles totouch.

2. Apply parking brakes. Move the selectorlever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-sary electrical systems (light, heater, airconditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence asillustrated.

CAUTION

O Always connect positive (+) topositive (+) and negative (−) tobody ground (for example, strutmounting bolt, engine lift bracket,etc. — not to the battery).

O Make sure that cables do nottouch moving parts in the enginecompartment and that clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and letit run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicleat about 2,000 rpm, and start your enginein the normal manner.

CAUTION

Do not keep starter motor engagedfor more than 10 seconds. If the en-gine does not start right away, turnthe key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds be-fore trying again.

7. After starting your engine, carefully dis-

connect the negative cable and then thepositive cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION

O Automatic transmission modelscannot be push started. This maycause transmission damage.

O Three way catalyst equippedmodels should not be started bypushing since the three way cata-lyst may be damaged.

O Never try to start the vehicle bytowing it; when the engine starts,


6-9

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

the forward surge could cause thevehicle to collide with the towvehicle.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVER-HEATSIf your vehicle is overheating indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading, orif you feel a lack of engine power, detectabnormal noise, etc., take the following steps:

WARNING

O Do not continue to drive if your ve-hicle overheats. Doing so couldcause a vehicle fire.

O To avoid the danger of beingscalded, never remove the radia-tor cap while the engine is still

hot. When the radiator cap isremoved, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causingserious injury.

O Do not open the hood if steam iscoming out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the gearshiftlever to the neutral position (automatictransmission to P (Park)).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Openall the windows, move the heater or airconditioner temperature control to maxi-mum hot and fan control to high speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused by climb-ing a long hill on a hot day, run the engineat a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm)

until the temperature gauge indication re-turns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radia-tor before opening the hood. Wait until nosteam or coolant can be seen beforeproceeding.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from theengine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

6. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the cooling fan belt is missing or loose or


6-10

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

the cooling fan does not run, stop theengine.

WARNING

O Be careful not to allow your hands,hair, jewelry or clothing to comeinto contact with, or to get caughtin, the cooling fan or drive belt.

O The engine cooling fan can startat any time when the coolanttemperature is high.

7. After the engine cools down, check thecoolant level in the reservoir tank with theengine running. Add coolant to the reser-voir tank if necessary. Have your vehiclerepaired at the nearest INFINITI retailer.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLEWhen towing your vehicle, all State (Provin-

cial in Canada) and local regulations fortowing must be followed. Incorrect towingequipment could damage your vehicle. Tow-ing instructions are available from yourINFINITI dealer. Local service operators aregenerally familiar with the applicable laws andprocedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage toyour vehicle, INFINITI recommends having aservice operator tow your vehicle. It is advis-able to have the service operator carefully readthe following precautions.

WARNING

O Never ride in a vehicle that is be-ing towed.

O Never get under your vehicle afterit has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

O When towing, make sure that thetransmission, axles, steering sys-tem and powertrain are in workingcondition. If any unit is damaged,dollies must be used.

O Always attach safety chains be-fore towing.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.Please see your Warranty Information Bookletor Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for thetoll-free number to call.


6-11

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYINFINITI

Two wheel drive models

INFINITI recommends that your vehicle betowed with the driving (rear) wheels off theground or be placed on a flat bed truck asillustrated.

CAUTION

O Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the rear wheels onthe ground or four wheels on theground (forward or backward), asthis may cause serious and expen-sive damage to the transmission.If it is necessary to tow the vehiclewith the front wheels raised, al-ways use towing dollies under therear wheels.

O When towing automatic transmis-sion models with the front wheelson the ground or on towingdollies:

SIE0052

SIE0053


6-12

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O Turn the ignition key to theOFF position, and secure thesteering wheel in a straightahead position with a rope orsimilar device. Never securethe steering wheel by turningthe ignition key to the LOCKposition. This may damagethe steering lock mechanism.

If the speed or distance must necessarily begreater, remove the propeller shaft beforetowing to prevent damage to the transmission.

Four wheel drive models

INFINITI recommends that towing dollies beused when towing your vehicle or the vehiclebe placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated. CAUTION

Never tow All-mode 4WD modelswith any of the wheels on the ground

SIE0031


6-13

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

as this may cause serious and ex-pensive damage to the transfercase.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing astuck vehicle)

WARNING

O Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

O Do not spin your tires at highspeed. This could cause them toexplode and result in serious in-jury. Parts of your vehicle couldalso overheat and be damaged.

CAUTION

O Use the towing hook only, notother parts of the vehicle. Other-wise, the vehicle body will bedamaged.

O Use the towing hook only to free avehicle stuck in sand, snow,mud, etc. Never tow the vehiclefor a long distance using only thetowing hook.

O The towing hook is under tremen-dous force when used to free astuck vehicle. Always pull the

cable straight out from the front ofthe vehicle. Never pull on thehook at an angle.

SIE0049


6-14

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

7 APPEARANCE AND CARE

Cleaning exterior.......................................... 7-2Washing.................................................. 7-2Waxing.................................................... 7-3Removing spots ..................................... 7-3Underbody .............................................. 7-3Glass....................................................... 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels .......................... 7-3Chrome parts ......................................... 7-3

Cleaning interior .......................................... 7-4

Floor mats .............................................. 7-4Seat belts ............................................... 7-5

Corrosion protection.................................... 7-5Most common factors contributing tovehicle corrosion .................................... 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion ................................................ 7-5To protect your vehicle fromcorrosion ................................................ 7-5

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CLEANING EXTERIORIn order to maintain the appearance of yourvehicle, it is important to take proper care ofit.

In the following cases, please wash yourvehicle as soon as possible to protect thepaint surface.

O After a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

O After driving on coastal roads

O When contaminants such as soot, birddroppings, tree sap, metal particles orbugs get on the paint surface

O When dust or mud builds up on thesurface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in

a shady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-face when putting on or removing thebody cover.

WASHING

Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the vehiclewith a wet sponge and plenty of clean water.Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap such as Nissan Car Wash, or a generalpurpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean,lukewarm (never hot) water. Rinse the vehicleagain with plenty of clean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerableto the effects of road salt. Therefore, theseareas must be regularly cleaned. Make surethat the drain holes in the lower edge of thedoor are open. Spray water under the bodyand in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt andwash away road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surfaceby using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

CAUTION

O Do not use strong household soap,strong chemical detergents, gaso-line or solvents.

O Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight or while the vehicle bodyis hot, as the surface may be-come water-spotted.

O Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts.Care must be taken when remov-ing caked-on dirt or other foreignsubstances so that the paint sur-face is not scratched or damaged.

APPEARANCE AND CARE

7-2

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WAXINGIf you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a waxspecified for use over clear coats, such asNissan Liquid or Spray Wax, because yourINFINITI has been finished with the finest paintand hard clear coats. Your INFINITI retailer canassist you in choosing the proper product.

O Wax your vehicle only after a thoroughwashing. Follow the instructions suppliedwith the wax.

O Do not use a wax containing any abra-sives, cutting compounds or cleaners thatmay damage the vehicle finish.

O If the surface does not polish easily, use a“road tar” remover and wax again.

Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a base coat/clear coat paintfinish may dull the finish or leave swirlmarks.

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,insects, and tree sap as quickly as possiblefrom the paint surface to avoid lasting damageor staining. Special cleaning products areavailable at your INFINITI retailer or automo-tive accessory stores.

UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, theunderbody must be cleaned regularly. Thiswill prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing underbody and suspension corrosion.Before the winter period and again in thespring, the underseal must be checked and, ifnecessary, re-treated.

GLASSUse glass cleaner to remove smoke and dustfilm from the glass surfaces. It is normal forglass to become coated with a film after thevehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleanerand a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-dow, do not use sharp-edged tools,abrasive cleaners or chlorine baseddisinfectant cleaners. They coulddamage the electrical conductors,radio antenna elements or the rearwindow defogger elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELSWash regularly, especially during wintermonths in areas where road salt is used. Saltcould discolor the wheel if not removed.

CHROME PARTSClean chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

APPEARANCE AND CARE

7-3

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CLEANING INTERIOROccasionally remove loose dust from theinterior trim, plastic parts and seats using avacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyland leather surfaces with a clean, soft clothdampened in mild soap solution, then wipeclean with a dry soft cloth. Before using anyfabric protector, read the manufacturer’s rec-ommendations. Some fabric protectors con-tains chemicals that stain or bleach the seatmaterial. Use a cloth dampened only withwater, to clean the meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

O Never use gasoline, thinner or anysimilar material.

O The leather seats should be regu-larly coated with a leather wax

like saddle soap. Never use carwax.

O Never use fabric protectors un-less recommended by the manu-facturer.

O Do not use glass or plasticcleaner on meter or gauge lenscovers. It may damage the lenscover.

FLOOR MATS

The use of genuine floor mats can extend thelife of your vehicle carpet and make it easier toclean the interior. No matter what matsare used, be sure they are fitted foryour vehicle and are properly posi-tioned in the footwell to prevent inter-ference with pedal operation. Matsshould be maintained with regular cleaningand replaced if they become excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid

This model includes a front floor mat bracketto act as a floor mat positioning aid. INFINITIfloor mats have been specially designed foryour vehicle model. The driver side floor mathas a grommet hole incorporated in it. Simplyposition the mat by placing the floor matbracket through the floor mat grommet holewhile centering the mat in the floorpan con-tour.

Periodically check to make certain that themats are properly positioned.

SIA0004

APPEARANCE AND CARE

7-4

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soapsolution. Allow the belts to dry completelybefore using them.

WARNING

Do not allow wet belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, orchemical solvents since these mayseverely weaken the seat belt web-bing.

CORROSION PROTECTION

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION:

1. The accumulation of moisture-retainingdirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

2. Damage to paint and other protectivecoatings caused by gravel and stone chipsor minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OF COR-ROSION:

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on thevehicle body underside can accelerate corro-sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry com-pletely inside the vehicle, and should beremoved for drying to avoid floor panelcorrosion.

Relative humidityCorrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing whereatmospheric pollution exists, or where roadsalt is used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate the rateof corrosion to those parts which are not wellventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in theair in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use willaccelerate the corrosion process. Road saltwill also accelerate the disintegration of paintsurfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION:

O Wash your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

O Always check for minor damage to thepaint and repair it as soon as possible.

O Keep drain holes at the bottom of thedoors open to avoid water accumulation.

O Check the underbody for accumulation of

APPEARANCE AND CARE

7-5

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash withwater as soon as possible.

CAUTION

O NEVER remove dirt, sand or otherdebris from the passenger com-partment by washing it out with ahose. Remove dirt with a vacuumcleaner or broom.

O Never allow water or other liquidsto come in contact with electroniccomponents inside the vehicle asthis may damage them.

O See your INFINITI retailer for as-sistance.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must becleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust andcorrosion, which may be required in someareas, consult your local INFINITI retailer.

APPEARANCE AND CARE

7-6

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

8 DO-IT-YOURSELF

Maintenance precautions............................. 8-2Engine compartment check locations ......... 8-4Engine cooling system ................................ 8-5

Checking engine coolant level................ 8-5Changing engine coolant........................ 8-6

Engine oil ..................................................... 8-7Checking engine oil level........................ 8-7Changing engine oil................................ 8-8Changing engine oil filter....................... 8-9

Automatic transmission fluid .................... 8-10Temperature conditions forchecking ............................................... 8-10

Power steering fluid .................................. 8-11Brake fluid.................................................. 8-12Window washer fluid................................. 8-12Battery ....................................................... 8-13

Jump starting....................................... 8-14Drive belts ................................................. 8-14Spark plugs ............................................... 8-15

Replacing spark plugs.......................... 8-15Air cleaner.................................................. 8-15

Windshield wiper blades............................ 8-16Cleaning................................................ 8-16Replacing.............................................. 8-17

Parking brake and brake pedal.................. 8-18Checking parking brake........................ 8-18Checking brake pedal ........................... 8-18Brake booster ....................................... 8-19

Fuses.......................................................... 8-19Engine compartment ............................ 8-19Passenger compartment ...................... 8-21Multi-remote controller batteryreplacement ......................................... 8-21

Lights......................................................... 8-22Headlights............................................. 8-22Exterior and interior lights ................... 8-23

Wheels and tires........................................ 8-29Tire pressure ........................................ 8-29Types of tires ....................................... 8-30Tire chains............................................ 8-31Changing wheels and tires................... 8-31

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

MAINTENANCE PRECAU-TIONSWhen performing any inspection or mainte-nance work on your vehicle, always take careto prevent serious accidental injury to yourselfor damage to the vehicle. The following aregeneral precautions which should be closelyobserved.

WARNING

O Park the vehicle on a level sur-face, apply the parking brake se-curely and block the wheels to pre-vent the vehicle from moving.Move the selector lever to the P(Park) position.

O Be sure to turn the ignition key tothe OFF or LOCK position whenperforming any replacement orrepair.

O If you must work with the enginerunning, keep your hands, cloth-ing, hair and tools away frommoving fans, belts and any othermoving parts.

O It is advisable to secure or re-move any loose clothing and anyjewelry, such as rings, watches,etc. before working on your ve-hicle.

O Always wear eye protectionwhenever you work on your ve-hicle.

O If you must run the engine in anenclosed space such as a garage,be sure there is proper ventilationfor exhaust gases to escape.

O Never get under the vehicle whileit is supported only by a jack. If it

is necessary to work under thevehicle, support it with safetystands.

O Keep smoking materials, flameand sparks away from fuel andbattery.

O The fuel filter or fuel lines shouldbe serviced by an INFINITI re-tailer because the fuel lines areunder high pressure even whenthe engine is off.

CAUTION

O Do not work under the hood whilethe engine is hot. Turn off the en-gine and wait until it cools down.

O Never connect or disconnect ei-

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-2

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

ther the battery or any transistor-ized component connector whilethe ignition is on.

O Never leave the engine or auto-matic transmission related com-ponent harness connector discon-nected while the ignition key ison.

O Never leave the engine or theautomatic transmission relatedcomponent harness connectordisconnected while the ignitionkey is on.

O Avoid direct contact with usedengine oil and coolant. Improp-erly disposed engine oil, enginecoolant, and/or other vehicle flu-ids can hurt the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulationsfor disposal of vehicle fluid.

This “8. Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc-tions regarding only those items which arerelatively easy for most owners to perform.More involved service should be done by yourINFINITI retailer.

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is alsoavailable. See “Owner’s Manual/ServiceManual order information” in the “10. Tech-nical and consumer information” section.

You should be aware that incomplete orimproper servicing may result in operatingdifficulties or excessive emissions, and couldaffect your warranty coverage. If in doubtabout any servicing, have it done byyour INFINITI retailer.

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-3

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SID0201

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-4

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEMThe engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solu-tion contains rust and corrosion inhibitors,therefore additional cooling system additivesare not necessary.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant,use only genuine NISSAN anti-freezecoolant or equivalent with the propermixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and50% demineralized water/distilledwater.

The use of other types of coolantsolutions may damage your enginecooling system.

Outsidetemperature

down toAnti-

freeze

Demineral-ized water/

distilledwater°C °F

−35 −30 50% 50%

WARNING

O Never remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. Seriousburns could be caused by highpressure fluid escaping from theradiator. Wait until the engine andradiator cool down. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “6. Incase of emergency” section.

O The radiator is equipped with apressure cap. To prevent enginedamage, use only a genuineINFINITI radiator cap.

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tankwhen the engine is cold. If the coolant level isbelow MIN, add coolant up to the MAX level.If the reservoir tank is empty, check thecoolant level in the radiator when the en-gine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant inthe radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up tothe filler opening and also add it to thereservoir tank up to the MAX level.

If the cooling system requires coolant

SID0083

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-5

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

frequently, have it checked by yourINFINITI retailer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOL-ANTO Major cooling system repairs should be

performed by your INFINITI retailer. Theservice procedures can be found in theappropriate INFINITI Service Manual.

O Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

O To avoid the danger of beingscalded, never change the coolantwhen the engine is hot.

O Never remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. Seriousburns could be caused by high

pressure fluid escaping from theradiator.

O Avoid direct skin contact withused coolant. If skin contact ismade, wash thoroughly with soapor hand cleaner as soon as pos-sible.

O Keep coolant out of reach of chil-dren and pets.

When changing engine coolant, be sure theignition switch is off.

1. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom ofradiator, and remove radiator filler cap.

O Be careful not to allow coolant to con-tact drive belts.

O Waste coolant must be disposed ofproperly. Check your local regula-tions.

2. Close the radiator drain plug securely afterthe coolant is drained.

SID0084

SID0085

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-6

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

3. Fill the radiator slowly with the propermixture of anti-freeze solution and dem-ineralized water/distilled water. Fill thereservoir tank up to the MAX level. Theninstall the radiator filler cap.

4. Start the engine and warm it up until itreaches normal operating temperature.Then race the engine two or three timesunder no load. Watch the engine coolanttemperature gauge for signs of overheat-ing.

5. Stop the engine. After it completelycools down, refill the radiator up to thefiller opening. Fill the reservoir tank up tothe MAX level.

6. Check the drain plug for any sign ofleakage.

7. Recheck the coolant level after the vehiclehas been driven for a day.

ENGINE OIL

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operatingtemperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check theoil level. It should be between the H and Lmarks. If the oil level is below the L mark,remove the oil filler cap and pour recom-mended oil through the opening. Do notoverfill.

6. Recheck oil level with dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during the

SID0206

SID0210

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-7

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

break-in period, depending on the se-verity of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regu-larly. Operating with insufficientamount of oil can damage the en-gine, and such damage is not cov-ered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operatingtemperature, and then turn it off and waitmore than 10 minutes.

3. Place a large drain pan under the drainplug.

4. Remove the oil filler cap.

5. Remove the drain plug with a wrench andcompletely drain the oil.

If oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See later in thissection for changing engine oil filter.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. Theengine oil will be hot.

O Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

O Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and re-install the drain plug and anew washer. Securely tighten the drainplug with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 Nzm)

Do not use excessive force.

7. Refill the engine with recommended oiland install the cap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “10. Technical andconsumer information” section for drainand refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends onthe oil temperature and drain time. Usethese specifications for reference only.Always use the dipstick to determine whenthe proper amount of oil is in the engine.

SID0207

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-8

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

8. Start the engine.

Check for leakage around the drain plug.Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with thedipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

10.Dispose of waste oil in the proper manner.

WARNING

O Prolonged and repeated contactwith used engine oil may causeskin cancer.

O Try to avoid direct skin contactwith used oil. If skin contact ismade, wash thoroughly with soapor hand cleaner as soon as pos-sible.

O Keep used engine oil out of reachof children.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FIL-TER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filterwrench. (Depending on the engine model,a special cap-type wrench may be re-quired. See your INFINITI retailer.) Thenremove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. Theengine oil will be hot.

4.Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surfacewith a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old rubber gasketremaining on the mounting surface of theengine.

5. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filterwith clean engine oil.

6. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resis-tance is felt, then tighten additionally morethan 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:10.85 to 15.11 ft-lb (14.7 to20.5 Nzm)

SID0208

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-9

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

7. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

8. Turn the engine off and wait severalminutes. Check the oil level. Add engineoil if necessary.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS-SION FLUID

WARNING

O When engine is running, keephands, jewelry and clothing awayfrom any moving parts such as fanand drive belt.

O Automatic transmission fluid ispoisonous and should be storedcarefully in marked containersout of the reach of children.

TEMPERATURE CONDITIONSFOR CHECKING

The fluid level should be checked using theHOT range (L & H marks) on the dipstick atfluid temperatures between 122 and 176°F(50 and 80°C) after the vehicle has beendriven approximately 5 minutes in urban areasafter the engine is warmed up. The level canbe checked at fluid temperatures between 86and 122°F (30 and 50°C) using the “COLD”range on the dipstick for reference, after theengine is warmed up but before driving.However, the fluid level must be recheckedusing the HOT range.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and setthe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and then move the selec-tor lever through each gear range endingin P (Park). 3. Check the fluid level with the engine

idling.

SID0209

SID0226

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-10

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

4. Expand the spring stopper and remove thedipstick. Wipe it clean with lint-free paper.

5. Reinsert the dipstick into the charging pipeas far as it will go.

6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading.If the level is at the low side of eitherrange, add fluid to the charging pipe.

7. When inserting the dipstick, set it so thatthe spring stopper presses the upper partof the dipstick rubber to lock the dipstick.

CAUTION

O Do not overfill.

O Use only Nissan Matic “D” (Con-tinental US and Alaska) orCanada Nissan Automatic Trans-mission Fluid. DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalent may also

be used. Outside the continentalUS and Alaska contact an INFINITIretailer for more information re-garding suitable fluids, includingrecommended brand(s) ofDexronTMIII/MerconTM automatictransmission fluid.

NOTE:

If the vehicle has been driven for a longtime at high speeds, or in city traffic inhot weather, or if it is being used to pulla trailer, an accurate fluid level cannotbe read. You should wait until the fluidhas cooled down (about 30 minutes).

POWER STEERING FLUID

The fluid level should be checked using theHOT range on the dipstick at fluid temperatureof 122 to 176°F (50 to 80°C) or using theCOLD range on the dipstick at fluid tempera-ture of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C).

SID0094

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-11

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CAUTION

O Do not overfill.

O Use Genuine Nissan PSF II orequivalent.

BRAKE FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid is below the MIN. line or the brakewarning light comes on, add Genuine Nissan

Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up tothe MAX. line. If fluid must be added fre-quently, the system should be checked byyour INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior, or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake system.The use of improper fluids can dam-age the brake system and affect thevehicle’s stopping ability.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. Iffluid is spilled, wash the surface withmild soap and water immediately.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

Add fluid when the low washer fluid warninglight comes on. Add a washer solvent to thewater for better cleaning. In the winter season,add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Followthe manufacturer’s instructions for the mixtureratio.

SID0095

SID0225

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-12

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WARNING

Anti-freeze is poisonous and shouldbe stored carefully marked contain-ers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution.This may result in damage to thepaint.

BATTERYO Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any

corrosion should be washed off with asolution of baking soda and water.

O Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

O If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 daysor longer, disconnect the (—) negativebattery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

O Do not expose the battery toflames or electrical sparks. Hy-drogen gas generated by batteryaction is explosive. Do not allowbattery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces.After touching a battery or batterycap, do not touch or rub your eyes.Thoroughly wash your hands. Ifthe acid contacts your eyes, skinor clothing, immediately flushwith water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

O Do not operate the vehicle if thefluid in the battery is low. Low

battery fluid can cause a higherload on the battery which cangenerate heat, reduce batterylife, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

O When working on or near a bat-tery, always wear suitable eyeprotection and remove all jew-elry.

O Battery posts, terminals and re-lated accessories contain leadand lead compounds. Washhands after handling.

O Keep the battery out of the reachof children.

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-13

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove thebattery cover if it is necessary). It should bebetween the MAX. and MIN. lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add onlydistilled water to bring the level to theindicator in each filler opening. Do notoverfill.

1. Remove the cell plugs.

2. Add distilled water up to the MAX. level.

3. Install the cell plugs.

Vehicle operated in high temperatures orunder severe conditions require frequentchecks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jumpstarting” in the “6. In case of emergency”section. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact your INFINITI retailer.

DRIVE BELTS

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFFor LOCK position. The engine couldrotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs ofunusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesionor looseness. If the belt is in poor condi-tion or loose, have it replaced or adjustedby your INFINITI retailer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for con-dition and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule in this manual.

IDI096

SID0212

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-14

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SPARK PLUGS

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the platinum-tipped spark plugs as frequently as the con-ventional type spark plugs since they will lastmuch longer. Follow the maintenance sched-ule, but do not reuse them by cleaning orregapping.

If replacement is required, see your INFINITIretailer for servicing.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignitionswitch are off and that the parkingbrake is engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket toremove the spark plugs. An incorrectsocket can damage the spark plugs.

Always replace with recommendedplatinum-tipped spark plugs.

AIR CLEANER

The filter element should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the mainte-nance intervals. See “Periodic maintenance”in the “9. Maintenance” section for mainte-nance intervals. When replacing the filter,wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing andthe cover with a damp cloth.

SID0200

SID0213

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-15

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WARNING

O Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air, itstops flame if the engine back-fires. If it is not there, and the en-gine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the aircleaner removed, and be carefulworking on the engine with the aircleaner removed.

O Never pour fuel into the throttlebody or attempt to start the en-gine with the air cleaner re-moved. Doing so could result inserious injury.

WINDSHIELD WIPERBLADESCLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may beon the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with awasher solution or a mild detergent. Yourwindshield is clean if beads do not form whenrinsing with clear water.

Clean the blade by wiping it with a clothsoaked in a washer solution or a mild deter-gent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. Ifyour windshield is still not clear after cleaningthe blades and using the wiper, replace theblades.

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-16

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

REPLACING

CAUTION

O After wiper blade replacement, re-turn the wiper arm to its originalposition. Otherwise it may bedamaged when the engine hood isopened.

Make sure the wiper blade con-tacts the glass, otherwise the armmay be damaged from wind pres-sure.

O Worn windshield wiper bladescan damage the windshield andimpair driven vision.

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Pull the wiper arm.

2. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiperblade.

3. Insert the new wiper blade to the wiper armuntil a click sounds.

If you wax the surface of the hood, becareful not to let wax get into the washer

IDI021

SID0218

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-17

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

nozzle. This may cause clogging or im-proper windshield washer operation. Ifwax gets into the nozzle, remove it witha needle or small pin.

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE PEDAL

CHECKING PARKING BRAKEPull the parking brake lever up. If the numberof clicks is out of the range as listed above,see your INFINITI retailer.

CHECKING BRAKE PEDALWith the engine running, check the distancebetween the upper surface of the pedal and themetal floor. If it is out of the range shownabove, see your INFINITI retailer.

Self-adjusting brakesYour vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear brakes self-adjust everytime the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See your INFINITI retailer for a brakesystem check if the brake pedalheight does not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle haveaudible wear indicators. When a brake padrequires replacement, it will make a highpitched scraping or screeching sound whenthe vehicle is in motion whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wearindicator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,occasional brake squeak, squeal or othernoise may be heard. Occasional brake noiseduring light to moderate stops is normal and

SID0105

IDI071MB

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-18

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

does not affect the function or performance ofthe brake system.

The rear drum brakes (if so equipped) do nothave audible wear indicators. Should you everhear an unusually loud noise from the reardrum brakes, have them inspected as soon aspossible by your INFINITI retailer.

Proper brake inspection intervalsshould be followed. See “Periodic mainte-nance” in the “9. Maintenance” section formaintenance intervals.

BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as follows:

1. With the engine off, press and release thebrake pedal several times. When brakepedal movement (distance of travel) re-mains the same from one pedal applicationto the next, continue on to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the

engine. The pedal height should drop alittle.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop theengine. Keeping the pedal depressed forabout 30 seconds, the pedal height shouldnot change.

4. Run the engine for one minute withoutdepressing the brake pedal, then turn it off.Depress the brake pedal several times. Thepedal travel distance will decrease gradu-ally with each depression as the vacuum isreleased from the booster.

If the brakes do not operate properly, see yourINFINITI retailer.

FUSES

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of higher amperage

rating than that specified on the fusebox cover. This could damage thevehicle electrical system or cause afire.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlightswitch are OFF .

SID0106

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-19

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a newfuse.

6. If a new fuse opens again, have theelectrical system checked and repaired byyour INFINITI retailer.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not operate

and fuses are in good condition, check thefusible links. If any of these fusible links aremelted, replace only with genuine parts. Seeyour INFINITI retailer.

SID0108

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-20

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlightswitch are OFF .

2. Pull to open the fuse box cover/coin tray.

3. Pull down the fuse box cover/coin tray toremove it.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a newfuse.

6. If a new fuse opens again, have theelectrical system checked and repaired byyour INFINITI retailer.

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACE-MENT

SID0223

SIP0311

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-21

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid using a suitable tool.

2. Replace the battery with a new one.Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 orequivalent

Make sure that the ! side faces the bot-tom case.

3. Close the lid securely.

4. Push the remote controller button two orthree times to check its operation.

See your INFINITI retailer if you need anyassistance for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 4above.

O Be careful not to touch a circuit plateand a battery terminal.

O An improperly disposed battery canharm the environment. Always con-

firm local regulations for battery dis-posal.

O The keyfob is water-proof. However,if it does get wet, immediately wipecompletely dry.

O When changing batteries, do not letdust or oil get on the controller.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer compli-ance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-vice.

LIGHTS

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing the xenon headlightbulb

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, theyproduce a high voltage. To preventan electric shock, never attempt tomodify or disassemble. Always haveyour xenon headlights replaced at anauthorized INFINITI retailer. For ad-ditional information, see “Headlightand turn signal switch” in the “2. In-struments and controls” section.

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-22

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Front turn signal light 21 7440

Front fog light (H3 type) 55

Front parking light/Side markerlight

See an authorized INFINITIretailer for assistance.

—

Rear combination light

Turn signal 27 1156 NA

Stop/Tail 21/5 7443

Back-up 18 921

High mounted stop light 5 168

License plate light 3.8 194

Interior light 10 —

Vanity mirror light 1.4 —

Personal light 8 —

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.

IDI044M

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-23

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

When replacing a bulb, first remove the lensand/or cover.

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-24

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SID0214A

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-25

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SID0215A

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-26

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SID0216

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-27

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SID0217

SID0112

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-28

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WHEELS AND TIRESIf you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” inthe “6. In case of emergency” section.

TIRE PRESSURE

Maximum inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum inflation pres-sures shown on the side wall of the tire.

Tire inflation pressureCheck the tire pressure (including spare) atleast once a month and always prior to long

distance trips. Incorrect tire pressure mayadversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.Tire pressure should be checked when thetires are COLD. Tires are considered COLDafter the vehicle has been parked for three ormore hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. COLD tire pressuresare shown on the tire placard affixed to theglove box lid.

WARNING

O Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

O The vehicle weight capacity isindicated on the tire placard. Donot load your vehicle beyond thiscapacity. Overloading your ve-hicle may result in reduced tirelife, unsafe operating conditionsdue to premature tire failure, or

unfavorable handling characteris-tics and could also lead to aserious accident. Loading beyondthe specified capacity may alsoresult in failure of other vehiclecomponents.

O Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you have loaded yourvehicle heavily, use a tire pres-sure gauge to ensure that the tirepressure is at the specified level.

O Do not drive your vehicle over 85MPH (140 km/h) unless it isequipped with high speed capa-bility tires. Driving faster than 85MPH (140 km/h) may result in tirefailure, loss of control and pos-sible injury.

O For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “Important

IDI002

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-29

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Tire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Infiniti WarrantyInformation Booklet.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

O When changing or replacing tires,be sure all four tires are of thesame type (i.e., summer, all sea-son or snow) and construction.Your INFINITI retailer may be ableto help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability. Replacement tiresmay have a lower speed ratingthan the factory equipped tires,and may not match the potential

maximum vehicle speed. Neverexceed the maximum speed rat-ing of the tire.

O For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Infiniti WarrantyInformation Booklet.

All season tiresINFINITI specifies all season tires on somemodels to provide good performance for useall year around, including snowy and icy roadconditions. All season tires are identified byALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire side-wall. Snow tires have better snow traction thanall season tires and may be more appropriatein some areas.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary toselect tires equivalent in size and load ratingto the original equipment tires. If you do not,it can adversely affect the safety and handlingof your vehicle.

If you install snow tires, they must also be thesame size, brand, construction and treadpattern on all four wheels.

Generally, snow tires will have lower speedratings than factory equipped tires and maynot match the potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximum speedrating of the tire.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, INFINITI recommends the use ofsnow or all season tires on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some provincesand states prohibit their use. Check local,state and provincial laws before installing

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-30

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces,may be poorer than that of non-studded snowtires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord-ing to location. Check the local laws beforeinstalling tire chains. When installing tirechains, make sure they are of proper size forthe tires on your vehicle and are installedaccording to the chain manufacturer’s sugges-tions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Class“S” chains are used on vehicles with restrictedtire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can useClass “S” chains are designed to meet theSAE standard minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are deter-mined using the factory equipped tire size.Other types may damage your vehicle. Use

chain tensioners when recommended by thetire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit.Loose end links of the tire chain must besecured or removed to prevent the possibilityof whipping action damage to the fenders orunderbody. If possible, avoid fully loadingyour vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, yourvehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle han-dling and performance may be adverselyaffected.

Do not use the chains on dry roads.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not drive with tire chains on paved roadswhich are clear of snow. Driving with chainsin such conditions can cause damage to thevarious mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress. When driving on clear pavedroads, be sure to change to 2WD.

CHANGING WHEELS ANDTIRES

Tire rotation

INFINITI recommends that tires be rotatedapproximately every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).However, the timing for tire rotation may varyaccording to your driving habits and roadsurface conditions.

Wheel nut tightening torque:98 ft-lb (133 Nzm)

See “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emergency”

SID0139

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-31

Z 02.9.12/JR50-D X

section for tire replacing procedures.

WARNING

O After rotating the tires, adjust thetire pressure.

O Retighten the wheel nuts after thevehicle has been driven for 600miles (1,000 km) (also in cases ofa flat tire, etc.).


Tire wear and damage

WARNING

O Tires should be inspected periodi-cally for wear, cracking, bulging,or objects caught in the tread. Ifexcessive wear, cracks, bulging,or deep cuts are found, the tireshould be replaced.

O The original tires have a built-intread wear indicator. When thewear indicator is visible, the tireshould be replaced.


Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size andload carrying capacity as the original equip-ment tires. See “Specifications” in the “10.Technical and consumer information” sectionfor tires and wheels.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-mended that all four tires be replaced withtires of the same size, brand, construction and

IDI004

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-32

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheelalignment should also be checked and cor-rected as necessary. Contact your INFINITIretailer.

WARNING

O The use of tires other than thoserecommended or the mixed use oftires of different brands, construc-tion (bias, bias-belted or radial),or tread patterns can adversely af-fect the ride, braking, handling,ground clearance, body-to-tireclearance, tire chain clearance,speedometer calibration, head-light aim and bumper height.Some of these effects may lead toaccidents and could result in seri-ous personal injury.

O If the wheels are changed for anyreason, always replace withwheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a dif-ferent offset could cause earlytire wear, possibly degraded ve-hicle handling characteristicsand/or interference with the brakediscs/drums. Such interferencecan lead to decreased brakingefficiency and/or early brakepad/shoe wear.

O Do not install a deformed wheelor tire even if it has been re-paired. Such wheels or tirescould have structural damage andcould fail without warning.

O The use of retread tire is notrecommended.


CAUTION

Always use tires of the same size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern onall four wheels. A spare tire of thesame size, brand, construction andtread pattern must also be used. Fail-ure to do so may result in a circum-ference difference between tires onthe front and rear axles which willcause excessive tire wear and maydamage the transmission, transfercase and differential gears.

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-33

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle han-dling and tire life. Even with regular use,wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, theyshould be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the driving wheels on thevehicle could lead to transmission dam-age. For additional information regard-ing tires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Infiniti War-ranty Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

O Wash the wheels when washing the vehicleto maintain their appearance.

O Clean the inner side of the wheels whenthe wheel is changed or the underside ofthe vehicle is washed.

O Do not use abrasive cleaners when wash-ing the wheels.

O Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

O INFINITI recommends that the road wheelsbe waxed to protect against road salt inareas where it is used during winter.

DO-IT-YOURSELF

8-34

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

9 MAINTENANCE

General maintenance ................................... 9-2Explanation of maintenance items ......... 9-3

Periodic maintenance schedules ................. 9-5

Schedule 1.............................................. 9-5Schedule 2.............................................. 9-6Explanation of maintenance items ....... 9-11

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Your new INFINITI has been designed to haveminimum maintenance requirements withlonger service intervals to save you both timeand money. However, some day-to-day andregular maintenance is essential to maintainyour INFINITI’s good mechanical condition, aswell as its emission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make surethat the specified maintenance, as well asgeneral maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only onewho can ensure that your vehicle receives theproper maintenance care. You are a vital linkin the maintenance chain.

General maintenance :

General maintenance includes those itemswhich should be checked during normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle. They areessential if your vehicle is to continue tooperate properly. It is your responsibility to

perform these procedures regularly asprescribed.

These checks or inspections can be done byyourself, a qualified technician or, if youprefer, your INFINITI retailer.

Periodic maintenance :

The maintenance items listed in this part arerequired to be serviced at regular intervals.

However, under severe driving conditions,additional or more frequent maintenance willbe required.

Where to go for service :

If maintenance service is required or yourvehicle appears to malfunction, have thesystems checked and serviced by an autho-rized INFINITI retailer.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained special-ists and are kept up to date with the latestservice information through technical bulle-tins, service tips, and in-dealership informa-

tion systems. They are completely qualified towork on INFINITI vehicles before work be-gins.

You can be confident that your INFINITI re-tailer’s service department performs the bestjob to meet the maintenance requirements onyour vehicle — in a reliable and economicway.

GENERAL MAINTENANCEDuring the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section.If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrationsor smell, be sure to check for the cause orhave your INFINITI retailer do it promptly. Inaddition, you should notify your INFINITIretailer if you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, see “Maintenance precautions” in the“8. Do-it-yourself” section.

MAINTENANCE

9-2

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

EXPLANATION OF MAINTE-NANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with * is found in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge atleast once a month and always prior to longdistance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressurein all tires, including the spare, to the pressurespecified. Check carefully for damage, cuts orexcessive wear.

Wheel nuts* When checking the tires, makesure no nuts are missing, and check for anyloose nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km). However, the timing

for tire rotation may vary according to yourdriving habits and road surface conditions.

Wheel alignment and balance If the ve-hicle pulls to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect unevenor abnormal tire wear, there may be a need forwheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normalhighway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded. For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Infiniti Warranty InformationBooklet.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regu-lar basis. Check the windshield at least everysix months for cracks or other damage. Havea damaged windshield repaired by a qualifiedrepair facility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check forcracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Doors and engine hood Check that all doorsand the engine hood, operate properly. Alsoensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricatehinges and latches if necessary. Make sure thatthe secondary latch keeps the hood from open-ing when the primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication fre-quently.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as whenperforming periodic maintenance, cleaning thevehicle, etc.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular ba-sis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights,tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all operating properly and installed se-curely. Also check headlight aim.

Warning lights and chime Make sure that

MAINTENANCE

9-3

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

all warning lights and chime are operatingproperly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Checkthat the wipers and washer operate properlyand that the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly andin sufficient quantity when operating the heateror air conditioner.

Steering wheel Check for changes in thesteering conditions, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises.

Seats Check seat position controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensurethey operate smoothly and that all latches locksecurely in every position. Check that the headrestraints move up and down smoothly and thatthe locks (if so equipped) hold securely in alllatched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and

retractors) operate properly and smoothly, andare installed securely. Check the belt webbingfor cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure the pedaldoes not catch or require uneven effort. Keepthe floor mats away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedalfor smooth operation and make sure it has theproper distance under it when depressed fully.Check the brake booster function. Be sure tokeep the floor mats away from the pedal.

Parking brake* Check that the lever has theproper travel and confirm that your vehicle isheld securely on a fairly steep hill with only theparking brake applied.

Automatic transmission P positionmechanism On a fairly steep hill check thatyour vehicle is held securely with the selector

lever in the P position without applying anybrakes.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically e.g. each time you checkthe engine oil or refuel.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that thereis adequate fluid in the tank.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolantlevel when the engine is cold.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, deteriora-tion or loose connections.

Brake fluid level* Make sure that the brakefluid level is between the MAX and MIN lineson the reservoir.

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines.

MAINTENANCE

9-4

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Vehicles operated in high temperatures orunder severe conditions require frequentchecks of the battery fluid level.

Engine drive belts* Make sure that no beltis frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after park-ing the vehicle on a level spot and turning offthe engine. (Be sure to wait a few minutes toallow the oil to drain back into the sump.)

Power steering fluid level* and linesCheck the level when the fluid is cold and theengine is turned off. Check the lines for properattachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Automatic transmission fluid level*Check the level after putting the selector leverin P (Park) with the engine idling.

Exhaust system Make sure there are noloose supports, cracks or holes. If the soundof the exhaust seems unusual or there is asmell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate thetrouble and correct it. See “Precautions when

starting and driving” in the “5. Starting anddriving” section for exhaust gas (carbon mon-oxide).

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances, other-wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuellines and around the exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, being carefulto clean those areas where mud and dirt mayaccumulate. For additional information, see“Cleaning exterior” in the “7. Appearance andcare” section.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel,oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehiclehas been parked for a while. Water drippingfrom the air conditioner after use is normal. Ifyou should notice any leaks or if gasolinefumes are evident, check for the cause and haveit corrected immediately.

PERIODIC MAINTENANCESCHEDULESTo ensure smooth, trouble-free, safe andeconomical driving, INFINITI provides twodifferent maintenance schedules that may beused, depending upon the conditions in whichyou usually drive. These schedules containboth distance and time intervals, up to 60,000miles (96,000 km)/48 months. For mostpeople, the odometer reading will indicatewhen service is needed. However, if you drivevery little, your vehicle should be serviced atthe regular time intervals shown in the sched-ule. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or48 months, continue periodic mainte-nance at the same mileage/time inter-vals.

SCHEDULE 1Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 ifyour driving habits frequently include one ormore of the following driving conditions:

MAINTENANCE

9-5

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

O Repeated short trips of less than 5miles (8 km).

O Repeated short trips of less than 10miles (16 km) with outside tempera-tures remaining below freezing.

O Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.

O Extensive idling and/or low speeddriving for long distances, such aspolice, taxi or door-to-door deliveryuse.

O Driving in dusty conditions.

O Driving on rough, muddy, or saltspread roads.

O Towing a trailer, using a camper ora car-top carrier.

SCHEDULE 2Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 ifnone of the driving conditions shown in

Schedule 1 apply to your driving habits.

MAINTENANCE

9-6

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Schedule 1Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. [ ]: At the mileage intervals only

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

Perform at number of miles, kilometersor months, whichever comes first.

Miles 3 1,000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60

(km 3 1,000) (6) (12) (18) (24) (30) (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) (72) (78) (84) (90) (96)

Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (1) [R] [R]

EVAP vapor lines I* I*

Fuel lines I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (2)*

Engine coolant See NOTE (3) R*

Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

Engine oil filter(Use Part No. 15208 31U00 or 15208 65F00 or equivalent.) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

Spark plugs (PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km)

Intake & exhaust valve clearance* See NOTE (4)

NOTE: (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.(2) When the filter becomes clogged, the vehicle speed cannot be increased as the driver wishes. In such an event, replace the filter.(3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.(4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance., Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order

to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

MAINTENANCE

9-7

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Schedule 1Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. L = Lubricate.


Perform at number of miles, kilometersor months, whichever comes first.

Miles 3 1,000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60(km 3 1,000) (6) (12) (18) (24) (30) (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) (72) (78) (84) (90) (96)Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48

Chassis and body maintenanceBrake lines & cables I I I IBrake pads, rotors, drums & linings I I I I I I I IAutomatic transmission & all-mode 4WDtransfer fluid & differential gear oil (exc.LSD)

See NOTE (1) I I I I

Limited-slip differential (LSD) gear oil See NOTE (1) I R I RSteering gear, linkage & transfer gear, axle & suspension parts I I I I I I I ITire rotation See NOTE (2)Drive shaft boots and propeller shaft (4WD) I I I I I I I IPropeller shaft (4WD) See NOTE (3) L L L L L L L LFront wheel bearing grease (2WD) I IFront wheel bearing grease (4WD) See NOTE (4) I R I RExhaust system I I I I I I I IIn-cabin microfilter R R R RAutomatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) vacuum hoses I I I I

NOTE: (1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough/muddy roads, change (not just inspect) fluid (A/T, all mode 4WD transfer)/oil atevery 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months except for LSD, and change LSD gear oil at every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months.

(2) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section.(3) The propeller shaft should be re-greased daily if it is immersed in water.(4) If operating frequently in water, replace grease every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 3 months.

MAINTENANCE

9-8

Z 02.6.26/JR50-D X

Schedule 2Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. [ ]: At the mileage intervals only


Perform at number of miles, kilometers ormonths, whichever comes first.

Miles 3 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60

(km 3 1,000) (12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96)

Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48

Emission control system maintenance

Drive belts I* I*

Air cleaner filter [R] [R]

EVAP vapor lines I* I*

Fuel lines I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (1)*

Engine coolant See NOTE (2) R*

Engine oil R R R R R R R R

Engine oil filter (Use Part No. 15208 31U00 or 15208 65F00 equiva-lent.)

R R R R R R R R

Spark plugs (PLATINUM-TIPPED type) Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km)

Intake & exhaust valve clearance* See NOTE (3)

NOTE: (1) When the filter becomes clogged, the vehicle speed cannot be increased as the driver wishes. In such an event, replace the filter.(2) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.(3) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance., Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order

to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

MAINTENANCE

9-9

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Schedule 2Abbreviations: R = Replace I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. L = Lubricate.


Perform at number of miles, kilometers ormonths, whichever comes first.

Miles 3 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60(km 3 1,000) (12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96)Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48

Chassis and body maintenanceBrake lines & cables I I I IBrake pads, rotors, drums & linings I I I IAutomatic transmission & all-mode 4WD transfer fluid & differentialgear oil (exc. LSD)

I I I I

Limited-slip differential (LSD) gear oil I R I RSteering gear, linkage & transfer gear, axle & suspension parts I ITire rotation See NOTE (1)Drive shaft boots and propeller shaft (4WD) I I I IPropeller shaft (4WD) See NOTE (2) L L L LFront wheel bearing grease (2WD) I IFront wheel bearing grease (4WD) I R I RExhaust system I IIn-cabin microfilter R R R RAutomatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) vacuum hoses I I I I

NOTE: (1) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section.(2) The propeller shaft should be re-greased after being immersed in water.

MAINTENANCE

9-10

Z 02.6.26/JR50-D X

Maintenance for offroad driving( only)Whenever you drive offroad through sand,mud or water as deep as the wheel hub, morefrequent maintenance may be required of thefollowing items:

m Brake pads and discs

m Brake lining and drums

m Brake lines and hoses

m Wheel bearing grease

m Differential, transmission and transfer oil

m Steering linkage

m Propeller shafts and front drive shafts

m Air cleaner filter

These items should be checked frequently toassure safe and proper operation of yourvehicle.

EXPLANATION OF MAINTE-NANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with * is found in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section.

Emission control system mainte-nance

Drive belts* Check drive belts for wear, fray-ing or cracking and also for proper tension. Re-place the drive belts if found damaged.

Air cleaner filter Under normal driving con-ditions, the air cleaner filter should be replacedin accordance with the maintenance schedule.However, driving the vehicle in dusty areasmay cause more rapid clogging of the element.Consequently, the element may have to be re-placed more frequently.

EVAP vapor lines Check vapor lines andconnections for failure or looseness. If leaksare found, replace them.

Fuel lines Check the fuel hoses, piping andconnections for leaks, looseness or deteriora-tion. Replace any parts if they are damaged.

Fuel filter When the filter becomes clogged,the vehicle speed cannot be increased as thedriver wishes. In such an event, replace the fil-ter.

Engine coolant* Drain and flush the coolingsystem.

Engine oil & oil filter* Under normal driv-ing conditions, the engine oil and oil filtershould be replaced in accordance with themaintenance schedule. However, under severedriving conditions, they may have to be re-placed more frequently.

Spark plugs* Replace with new plugs havingthe correct heat range.

Intake & exhaust valve clearance Checkthe valve clearance if valve noise increases.

MAINTENANCE

9-11

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Chassis and body maintenanceBrake lines & cables Check the brake linesand hoses (including brake booster vacuumhoses, connections & check valve) and parkingbrake cables for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterioration, etc.

Brake pads, rotors, drums & liningsCheck these and the other neighboring brakecomponents for wear, deterioration and leaks.Under severe driving conditions, they mayhave to be inspected more frequently.

Automatic transmission oil & differen-tial gear oil* Visually inspect for signs ofleakage. Under severe driving conditions, theoil should be replaced at the specified interval.

Steering gear, linkage & transfer gear,axle and suspension parts Check for dam-age, looseness and leakage of oil or grease.Under severe driving conditions, more frequentinspection should be performed.

Drive shaft boot and propeller shaft(s)

Check for damage, looseness and grease leak-age under severe driving condition.

Propeller shaft Apply specified grease to thegreasing points of propeller shafts in accor-dance with the maintenance schedule. In thecase of driving in water, greasing should beperformed immediately afterwards.

Front wheel bearing grease Check thewheel bearing for grease leakage aroundgrease seals, axial end play and smooth turn-ing (2WD). Check the wheel bearing greasecondition or repack these in accordance withthe maintenance schedule. In case of frequentdriving in muddy water, the bearing grease in-spection should be performed more frequently(4WD).

Exhaust system Visually check the exhaustpipes, muffler, and hangers for proper attach-ment, leaks, cracks, chafing, abrasion, deterio-ration, etc. Under severe driving conditions, in-spection should be performed more frequently.

In-cabin microfilter Under normal condi-tions, the in-cabin microfilter should be re-placed in accordance with the maintenanceschedule. However, in some situations, themicrofilter may clog more rapidly (dependingon the air conditioner’s working environment).If this happens, the air flow may decrease, orthe windows may fog up easily when the airconditioner is in use, the microfilter should bereplaced immediately at your INFINITI retailer.

Automatic Speed Control (ASCD)vacuum hoses Check vacuum hose (betweenASCD actuator and ASCD pump) for breakage,cracks or fracture.

MAINTENANCE

9-12

Z 02.6.26/JR50-D X

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

10 TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants ............................................ 10-2

Fuel recommendation........................... 10-3Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation .................................. 10-5Recommended SAE viscositynumber ................................................. 10-7Air conditioner system refrigerant andlubricant recommendations.................. 10-8

Specifications ............................................ 10-9Engine................................................... 10-9Wheels and tires ................................ 10-10Dimensions and weights .................... 10-10

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country ....................................... 10-11Vehicle identification................................ 10-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate.................................................... 10-11

Vehicle identification number (Chassisnumber).............................................. 10-12Engine serial number ......................... 10-12F .M.V.S.S. certification label ............. 10-12Emission control information label .... 10-13Tire placard ........................................ 10-13Air conditioner specification label...... 10-13

Vehicle loading information..................... 10-14Terms ................................................. 10-14Determining vehicle payloadcapacity .............................................. 10-14Securing the load ............................... 10-15Loading tips........................................ 10-15Payload weight capacity..................... 10-16Measurement of weights.................... 10-16

Towing a trailer........................................ 10-16Maximum load limits.......................... 10-17Towing load/specification chart ......... 10-18Towing safety ..................................... 10-18

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Uniform tire quality grading............... 10-21Emission control system warranty .......... 10-22Reporting safety defects (US only) ......... 10-23Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)test (US only) .......................................... 10-23

Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation .............................................. 10-25In the event of a collision........................ 10-26

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTSThe following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedureinstructed in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate)Recommended specifications

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 20-7/8 gal 17-3/8 gal 79 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)*1

Engine oil (Drain and refill)*9O API Certification Mark*2, *3O API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*2, *3O ILSAC grade GF-I GF-II & GF-III*2, *3

With oil filter change 5-1/4 qt 4-3/8 qt 5.0

Without oil filter change 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt 4.8

Cooling system

With reservoir 9-3/4 qt 8-1/8 qt 9.2 Genuine NISSAN anti-freeze coolant or equivalent

Differential gear oil — — —Standard differential gear: API GL-5*3Limited-slip differential (LSD) gear:Use only LSD gear oil API GL-5 and SAE 80W-90*6 approved for Nissan LSD*7.

Automatic transmission fluid

Refill to the proper oil level according to the instruc-tions in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section.

Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid.*5

Power steering fluid Genuine Nissan PSF II or equivalent*10

All-mode 4WD transfer fluid Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid.*8

Brake fluid Genuine Brake Fluid*4 or equivalent DOT 3 (U.S. FMVSS No. 116)

Propeller shaft grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Molybdenum disulphide lithium soap base)

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)

Air conditioning system lubricants Nissan A/C System OilType S or equivalent

*1: See later in this section for fuel recommendation.*2: See later in this section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.*3: See later in this section for recommended SAE viscosity number.*4: Available in mainland U.S. through your INFINITI retailer.*5: DEXRONTM III/MERCONTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental U.S. and Alaska contact an authorized INFINITI retailer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s)

of DEXRONTM III/MERCONTM Automatic Transmission Fluid.*6: SAE 90 is acceptable in temperatures above 0°F (−18°C).*7: Contact your INFINITI retailer for a list of approved oils.*8: Outside the continental U.S. and Alaska contact an authorized INFINITI retailer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM Automatic Transmission Fluid.*9: See “Changing engine oil” in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section for further details.*10: Genuine Nissan PSF, Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid, DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.

TECHNICAL AND CONSUMER INFORMATION

10-2

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONUse unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)number (Research octane number 91).

For improved vehicle performance, INFINITIrecommends the use of unleaded premiumgasoline with an octane rating of at least 91AKI number (Research octane number 96).

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol devices and systems, andcould also affect warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, since thiswill damage the three way catalyst.

Reformulated gasolineSome fuel suppliers are now producing refor-mulated gasolines. These gasolines are spe-cially designed to reduce vehicle emissions.INFINITI supports efforts towards cleaner airand suggests that you use reformulated gaso-line when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenatesSome fuel suppliers sell gasoline containingoxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE andmethanol with or without advertising theirpresence. INFINITI does not recommend theuse of fuels of which the oxygenate contentand the fuel compatibility for your INFINITIcannot be readily determined. If in doubt, askyour service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, pleasetake the following precautions as the usage ofsuch fuels may cause vehicle performanceproblems and/or fuel system damage.

O The fuel should be unleaded and

have an octane rating no lower thanthat recommended for unleadedgasoline.

O If an oxygenate-blend, excepting amethanol blend, is used, it shouldcontain no more than 10% oxygen-ate. (MTBE may, however, be addedup to 15%.)

O If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitableamount of appropriate cosolventsand corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-erly formulated with appropriatecosolvents and corrosion inhibitors,such methanol blends may cause fuelsystem damage and/or vehicle per-formance problems. At this time, suf-ficient data is not available to ensurethat all methanol blends are suitablefor use in INFINITI vehicles.


10-3

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

If any undesirable driveability problems suchas engine stalling and hard hot starting areexperienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuelor a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during re-fueling. Gasoline containing oxygen-ates can cause paint damage.

Aftermarket fuel additivesINFINITI does not recommend the use of anyfuel additives (i.e. fuel injector cleaner, octanebooster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.)which are sold commercially. Many of theseadditives intended for gum, varnish or depositremoval may contain active solvent or similaringredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tipsIn most parts of North America, you shoulduse unleaded gasoline with an octane rating ofat least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number.

However, you may use unleaded gasoline withan octane rating as low as 85 AKI (Anti-KnockIndex) number in these high altitude areas[over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)] such as: Colorado,Montana, New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming,northeastern Nevada, southern Idaho, westernSouth Dakota, western Nebraska, and that partof Texas which is directly south of NewMexico.

Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than stated above cancause persistent, heavy “spark knock”.(“Spark knock” is a metallic rappingnoise.) If severe, this can lead to enginedamage. If you detect a persistent heavyspark knock even when using gasolineof the stated octane rating, or if you hearsteady spark knock while holding asteady speed on level roads, have yourdealer correct the condition. Failure tocorrect the condition is misuse of the ve-

hicle, for which INFINITI is not respon-sible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in knock-ing, after-run or overheating. This in turn maycause excessive fuel consumption or damageto the engine. If any of the above symptomsare encountered, have your vehicle checked atan INFINITI retailer or other competent servicefacility.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This isno cause for concern, because you getthe greatest fuel benefit when there islight spark knock for a short time underheavy engine load.


10-4

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct quality,and viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory enginelife and performance. Nissan recommends theuse of a low friction oil (energy conserving

oil) in order to improve fuel economy andconserve energy. Oils which do not have thespecified quality label should not be used asthey could cause engine damage.

Only those engine oils with the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) CERTIFICATIONMARK on the front of the container should be

used. This type of oil supersedes the existingAPI SG, SH or SJ and Energy Conserving IIcategories.

If you cannot find engine oil with the APICERTIFICATION MARK, use an API gradeSG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API gradeSJ or SL, Energy Conserving oil. An oil witha single designation SG or SH, or in combi-nation with other categories (for example,SG/CC or SG/CD) may also be used if onewith the API CERTIFICATION MARK cannotbe found. An ILSAC grade GF-I, II & III oil canalso be used.

INIFINITI does not recommend synthetic typeoils but recommends mineral based oils.These oils must however, meet the API qualityand SAE viscosity ratings specified for yourvehicle.

Oil additivesINFINITI does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not

SIT0115


10-5

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

necessary when the proper oil type is usedand maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or hasbeen previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is impor-tant that the engine oil viscosity be selectedbased on the temperatures at which thevehicle will be operated before the next oilchange. The chart “Recommended SAE vis-cosity number” shows the recommended oilviscosities for the expected ambient tempera-tures. Choosing an oil viscosity other thanthat recommended could cause serious enginedamage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine Nissan oil filter. When replac-ing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalentfor the reason described in “change intervals”.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Oil and filter other thanthe specified quality, or oil and filter changeintervals longer than recommended couldreduce engine life. Damage to engines causedby improper maintenance or use of incorrectoil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the new INFINITI vehicle warran-ties.

Your engine was filled with a high qualityengine oil when it was built. You do not haveto change the oil before the first recommendedchange interval. Oil and filter change intervalsdepend upon how you use your vehicle.Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes.

— repeated short distance driving at coldoutside temperatures,

— driving in dusty conditions,

— extensive idling,

— towing a trailer.


10-6

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOS-ITY NUMBER

O SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferredfor all temperatures. SAE 10W-30,10W-40 viscosity oil may be used ifthe ambient temperature is above0°F (−18°C).

O 80W-90 for differential is preferable.SIT0002

ITI002M


10-7

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND LUBRI-CANT RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning in your INFINITI ve-hicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubri-cant, Nissan A/C system oil Type S or theexact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or lu-bricant will cause severe damage tothe air conditioning system and willrequire the replacement of all airconditioning system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourINFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’sozone layer. Although this refrigerant does notaffect the earth’s atmosphere, certain govern-

mental regulations require the recovery andrecycling of any refrigerant during automotiveair conditioning system service. Your INFINITIretailer has the trained technicians and equip-ment needed to recover and recycle your airconditioning system refrigerant.

Contact your INFINITI retailer when servicingyour air conditioning system.


10-8

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

Model VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°

Bore 3 Stroke in (mm) 3.760 3 3.205 (95.5 3 81.4)

Displacementcu in (cm3)

213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6*1

Idle speed rpm

See the “Emission controllabel” on the underside of thehood.

Ignition timing (BTDC)degree/rpm

CO percentage at idle speed[No air] %

Spark plug

Standard PLFR5A-11

Service PLFR4A-11

Option PLFR6A-11

Spark plug gap in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

Alternator belt size

Width 3 Lengthin (mm)

0.8409 3 46.26(21.36 3 1,175)

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all require-ments of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-lations.

ITI034MA


10-9

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel Aluminum 17 x 8JJ

Offset in (mm) 0.79 (20)

Tire size Conventional P245/65R17 105S

Spare Conventional

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 183.1 (4,650)

Overall width in (mm) 72.4 (1,840)

Overall height in (mm)68.1 (1,730),70.7 (1,795)*

Front tread in (mm) 60.6 (1,540)

Rear tread in (mm) 60.8 (1,545)

Wheelbase in (mm) 106.3 (2,700)

Gross vehicleweight rating

lb (kg)

See the “F.M.V.S.S. certification la-bel” on the driver’s side lock pillar.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)


10-10

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WHEN TRAVELING OR REG-ISTERING YOURVEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRYIf you plan to travel in another country,you should first find out if the fuel available issuitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with too low an octane rating maycause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline.Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areaswhere appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration ofyour vehicle to another country, state,province or district, it may be necessary tomodify the vehicle to meet local laws andregulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicleemission control and safety standards varyaccording to the country, state, province or

district; therefore, vehicle specifications maydiffer.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, trans-portation, and registration are the re-sponsibility of the user. INFINITI is notresponsible for any inconvenience thatmay result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONVEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate isattached as shown. This number is the iden-tification for your vehicle and is used in thevehicle registration.

SIT0043


10-11

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine asshown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LA-BEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard(F .M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed asshown. This label contains valuable vehicleinformation, such as: Gross Vehicle WeightRatings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Re-view it carefully.

SIT0044

SIT0101

SIT0046


10-12

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

EMISSION CONTROL INFOR-MATION LABEL

The emission control information label isattached as shown.

TIRE PLACARD

The cold tire pressure is shown on the tireplacard affixed to the glove box lid.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICA-TION LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is at-tached as shown.

SIT0047

SIT0100

SIT0049


10-13

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

VEHICLE LOADING INFOR-MATION

WARNING

O It is extremely dangerous to ride ina cargo area inside of a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.


O Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with the

following terms before loading your vehicle:

O Curb Weight (actual weight of your ve-hicle) - vehicle weight including: standardand optional equipment, fluids, emergencytools, and spare tire assembly. This weightdoes not include passengers and cargo.

O GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weightplus the combined weight of passengersand cargo.

O GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -maximum total weight (load) limit speci-fied for the vehicle.

O GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maxi-mum weight (load) limit specified for thefront or rear axle.

DETERMINING VEHICLE PAY-LOAD CAPACITYThe payload capacity of this vehicle is deter-mined by weight, not by available cargospace. For example, a luggage rack, bike

carrier, cartop carrier or similar equipmentdoes not increase payload carrying capacity ofyour vehicle.

To determine vehicle payload capacity:

Vehicle weight can be determined by using acommercial-grade scale, found at places suchas a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator,or a scrap metal recycling facility.

1) Determine the curb weight of your vehicle.

2) Compare the curb weight amount to theGVWR specified for your vehicle to deter-mine how much more weight your vehiclecan carry.

3) After loading (cargo and passengers), re-weigh your vehicle to determine if eitherGVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is ex-ceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, removecargo as necessary. If either the front orrear GAWR is exceeded, shift the load orremove cargo as necessary.


10-14

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SECURING THE LOAD

There are tie down hooks located in the cargoarea. The tie down hooks can be used tosecure cargo with ropes or other types ofstraps.

Do not apply a total load of more than 22lbs. (10 kg) to a single hook when secur-ing cargo.

LOADING TIPS

O The GVW must not exceed GVWR orGAWR as specified on the FMVSS Certi-fication Label located on the driver’s doorcenter pillar.

O Do not load the front and rear axle to theGAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

O Loads should be spread out, and cargoshould be properly secured. Large orheavy objects should be placed toward the

front of the cargo area to help preventsliding or shifting.

WARNING


O Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts on your vehiclecan break, or it can change theway your vehicle handles. Thiscould result in loss of control andcause personal injury.

SIT0118 SIT0119


10-15

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

PAYLOAD WEIGHT CAPACITYThe payload weight capacity is the maximumtotal weight of passengers, optional equip-ment (air conditioning, trailer hitch, etc.) andcargo that your vehicle is designed to carry.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm thatyou do not exceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for your vehicle. See “Vehicleloading information” earlier in this section fordetails.

Also check tires for proper inflation pressures.See the tire placard affixed to the glove boxlid.

Payload Weight Capacity Unit: lb (kg)

VQ35DE

2WD 4WD

Automatic andManual

Transmission

Automatic andManual

Transmission

XE, SE, LE

US 940 (427) 920 (418)

Canada — 880 (400)

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight shiftsthat could affect the balance of your vehicle.When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scaleand weight the front and the rear wheelsseparately to determine axle loads. Individualaxle loads should not exceed either of thegross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total ofthe axle loads should not exceed the grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratingsare given on the vehicle certification label thatis located on the driver’s door lock pillar. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or remove

items to bring all weights below the ratings.

CAUTION

Overloading can shorten the life ofyour vehicle. Failures caused byoverloading are not covered by yourwarranty.

TOWING A TRAILER

Your new vehicle was designed to be used

ITI001


10-16

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

primarily to carry passengers and cargo.Remember that towing a trailer will placeadditional loads on your vehicle’s engine,drive train, steering, braking and other sys-tems.

Information on trailer towing and the specialequipment required should be obtained from aprofessional trailer dealer/installer.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the following TowingLoad/Specification Chart. The total trailer loadequals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.

O When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lb (454kg) or more, trailers with a brake systemMUST be used.

The maximum GCWR (Gross CombinedWeight Rating) should not exceed the value

specified in the following Towing Load Speci-fication Chart.

The GCWR equals the combined weight of thetowing vehicle (including passengers andcargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loadsgreater than these or using improper towingequipment could adversely affect vehicle han-dling, braking and performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer isnot only related to the maximum trailer loads,but also the places you plan to tow. Towweights appropriate for level highway drivingmay have to be reduced on very steep gradesor in low traction situations (for example, onslippery boat ramps).

WARNING

Vehicle damage and/or personal in-jury resulting from improper towing

procedures is not covered byINFINITI warranties. An InfinitiTrailer Towing Guide (U.S. only)containing information on trailertowing ability and the special equip-ment required may be obtained froman authorized INFINITI retailer.

Tongue load

Keep the tongue load between 9 to 11% of thetotal trailer load within the maximum tongueload limits shown in the following TowingLoad/Specifications Chart. If the tongue loadbecomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allowfor proper tongue load.


10-17

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Maximum gross vehicleweight/maximum gross axleweight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehiclemust not exceed the gross vehicle weightrating (GVWR) shown on the F .M.V.S.S.certification label. The gross vehicle weightequals the combined weight of the unloadedvehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other optional equip-ment. In addition, front or rear gross axleweight must not exceed the gross axle weight

rating (GAWR) shown on the F .M.V.S.S.certification label.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART

Unit: lb (kg)

MODELWEIGHT

QX-4VQ35DE (6-Cyl.)

A/T

MAXIMUMTRAILERWEIGHT*1

5,000 (2,268)

MAXIMUMTONGUE LOAD

500 (227)

GROSS COM-BINED WEIGHTRATING

9,500 (4,308)

RECOMMENDEDEQUIPMENT*2

Sway Control Device(SCD)

*1: All towing above 1,000 lb (454 kg) requires theuse of trailer brakes. INFINITI recommends the useof a tandem axle trailer whenever towing above3,000 lb (1,361 kg).

*2: A sway control device is recommended for alltowing above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Sway controldevices are not offered by INFINITI. See a profes-sional trailer/hitch outlet for a properly designedsway control device for your trailer.

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitchChoose a proper hitch for your vehicle andtrailer. A genuine INFINITI trailer hitch isavailable from your INFINITI retailer (US only).Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attachedto the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury orproperty damage due to sway caused bycrosswinds, rough road surfaces or passingtrucks.

SIT0050


10-18

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

CAUTION

O Special hitches which includeframe reinforcements are re-quired for towing above 2,000 lb(907 kg). Suitable GenuineINFINITI hitches for pickup truckand sport utility vehicles are avail-able at an authorized INFINITI re-tailer.

O Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

O Do not modify the vehicle exhaustsystem, brake system, etc. to in-stall a trailer hitch.

O After the hitch is removed, sealthe bolt holes to prevent exhaustfumes, water or dust from enter-ing the passenger compartment.

O Regularly check all hitch mount-ing bolts are securely mounted.

O To reduce the possibility of addi-tional damage if your vehicle isstruck from the rear, where prac-tical, remove the hitch and/or re-ceiver when not in use. After thehitch is removed, seal the boltholes to prevent exhaust fumes,water or dust from entering thepassenger compartment.

Tire pressures

O When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicletires to the recommended cold tire pres-sure indicated on the tire placard (locatedon the inside of the glove box lid).

O Trailer tire condition, size, load rating andproper inflation pressure should be inaccordance with the trailer and tire manu-

facturers’ specifications.

Safety chain

Always use a suitable chain between yourvehicle and the trailer. The chain should becrossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure toleave enough slack in the chain to permitturning corners.

Trailer lights

Trailer lights should comply with Federaland/or local regulations.

When wiring the vehicle for towing, con-nect the stop and tail light pickup intothe vehicle electrical circuit at a pointbetween the sensor and stop light switchor light switch.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a brakingsystem, make sure it conforms to Federal


10-19

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

and/or local regulations and that it is properlyinstalled.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake systemdirectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tipsO Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded or unloaded traileris hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it hasan abnormal nose-up or nose-down con-dition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other pos-sible causes of either condition.

O Always secure items in the trailer toprevent load shifts while driving.

O Be certain your rear view mirrors conformto all federal, state or local regulations. Ifnot, install any mirrors required for towing

before driving the vehicle.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding ofthe vehicle’s behavior, you should practiceturning, stopping and backing up in an areawhich is free from traffic. Steering stability,and braking performance will be somewhatdifferent than under normal driving condi-tions.

O Always secure items in the trailer toprevent load shift while driving.

O Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

O Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

O Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

O Always block the wheels on both vehicleand trailer when parking. Parking on aslope is not recommended; however, ifyou must do so, and if your vehicle isequipped with automatic transmission,

first block the wheels and apply the park-ing brake, and then move the transmissionselector lever into the P position. If youmove the selector lever to the P positionbefore blocking the wheels and applyingthe parking brake, transmission damagecould occur.

O When going down a hill, shift into a lowergear and use the engine braking effect.When ascending a long grade, downshiftthe transmission to a lower gear andreduce speed to reduce chances of engineoverloading and/or overheating.

However, for long steep grades, do notstay in 1st or 2nd gear when driving above35 MPH (56 km/h).

O If the engine coolant rises to an extremelyhigh temperature when the air conditioningsystem is on, turn off the air conditioner.Coolant heat can be additionally vented byopening the windows, switching the fan


10-20

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

control to high and setting the temperaturecontrol to the HOT position.

O Trailer towing requires more fuel thannormal circumstances.

O Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500miles (800 km).

O Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedmaintenance schedule.

O When making a turn, your trailer wheelswill be closer to the inside of the turn thanyour vehicle wheels. To compensate forthis, make a larger than normal turningradius during the turn.

O Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect vehicle/trailer handling, pos-sibly causing vehicle sway. When beingpassed by larger vehicles, be prepared forpossible changes in crosswinds that couldaffect vehicle handling. If swaying doesoccur, firmly grip the steering wheel, steer

straight ahead, and immediately (butgradually) reduce vehicle speed. Thiscombination will help stabilize the vehicle.Never increase speed.

O Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requiresconsiderably more distance than normalpassing. Remember the length of the trailermust also pass the other vehicle beforeyou can safely change lanes.

O To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do notuse overdrive (automatic transmission).

O Avoid holding the brake pedal down toolong or too frequently. This could causethe brakes to overheat, resulting in re-duced braking efficiency.

When towing a trailer, change fluid inthe transmission more frequently.

See the “9. Maintenance” section.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITYGRADINGDOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements in addition tothese grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-ture A

TreadwearTreadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on tire wear rate when tested undercontrolled conditions on specified governmenttest courses. For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times aswell on the government course as a tiregraded 100. However, relative tire perfor-mance depends on actual driving conditions,and may vary significantly due to variations in


10-21

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

driving habits, service practices and differ-ences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and CThe traction grades from highest to lowest areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to yourvehicle tires is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, anddoes not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak trac-tion characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

Temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C. They represent a tire’s resistance toheat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause tire mate-rial to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessivetemperatures can lead to sudden tire failure.Grade C corresponds to a performance levelwhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades A and B represent higher levels ofperformance on laboratory test wheels thanthe minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, under inflation, or ex-cessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

EMISSION CONTROLSYSTEM WARRANTYYour INFINITI is covered by the followingemission warranties.

For US

1) Emission Defects Warranty

2) Emissions Performance Warranty(See Warranty Information Booklet for de-tails.)

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with


10-22

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

other vehicle warranties in your WarrantyInformation Booklet [Warranty and RoadsideAssistance Information (Canada)] that comeswith your INFINITI. If you did not receive aWarranty Information Booklet [Warranty andRoadside Assistance Information (Canada)],or it has become lost, you may obtain areplacement by writing to or calling:

O INFINITI DivisionNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP .O. Box 191, Gardena, CA 90248-0191

O Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario,L4W 4Z5Tel. No. 1-800-387-0122

O INFINITI DivisionNissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii, Ltd.Consumer Affairs Department2880 Kilihau Street

Honolulu, Hawaii 96819Tel. No. 1-808-836-0888

REPORTING SAFETY DE-FECTS (US only)If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should imme-diately inform the National Highway Traf-fic Safety Administration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying INFINITI.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or INFINITI.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the AutoSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236. You may also write to: NHTSA,U.S. Department of Transportation,

Washington, D.C. 20590. You can alsoobtain other information about motor ve-hicle safety from the Hotline.

You may notify INFINITI by contactingour Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-662-6200.In Hawaii call 1-808-836-0888

READINESS FORINSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST(US only)Due to legal requirements in some states/areas, your vehicle may be required to be inwhat is called the ready condition for anInspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emis-sion control system.

The vehicle is set to the ready condition whenit is driven through certain driving patterns.Usually, the ready condition can be obtainedby ordinary usage of the vehicle.


10-23

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

If a powertrain system component is repairedor the battery is disconnected, the vehicle maybe reset to a not ready condition. Before takingthe I/M test, drive the vehicle through thefollowing pattern to set the vehicle to the readycondition.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe andprudent manner according to trafficconditions, and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idleuntil the engine coolant temperature gaugeneedle points between the C and H (nor-mal operating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the acceleratorpedal completely and maintain it releasedfor at least 6 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for amoment, then drive the vehicle at a speedof 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for atleast 5 minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine run-ning.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55km/h) and maintain the speed for 20seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least three times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3minutes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmissiongear shift lever in the “P” or “N” position.

9. Rev the engine up between 2,500 and3,500 rpm and hold it there for 3 consecu-tive minutes, then release the acceleratorpedal completely.

10.Wait 5 seconds with the engine at idle.

11.Rev the engine up between 2,000 and3,000 rpm and maintain that speed for 5consecutive minutes.

12.Turn the engine off.

13.Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one moretime.

If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode isacceptable between steps. Do not stop theengine until step 7 is completed.

Dynamometer testing forInspection/Maintenance (I/M)test (US only)Due to legal requirements in somestates/areas, your vehicle may be tested foremissions on a dynamometer. The 4WD shiftswitch MUST be in the 2WD position for I/Mtesting on a two wheel dynamometer.


10-24

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

WARNING

O If the 4WD shift switch is not in the2WD mode during the dynamom-eter I/M testing, the vehicle couldcome off the dynamometer andcause serious personal injuryand/or body damage to the ve-hicle.

O Serious damage will occur to the4WD system if the 4WD shiftswitch is not in the 2WD mode.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMA-TIONA genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information foryour vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams,illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and

adjustment procedures, this manual is thesame one used by the factory trained techni-cians working at authorized INFINITI retailer-ships. Also available are genuine INFINITIOwner’s Manuals, and genuine INFINITI Ser-vice and Owner’s Manuals for older INFINITImodels.

In the USA:

For current pricing and availability of genuineINFINITI Service Manuals for the 2000model year and later, contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-639-8841www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineINFINITI Service Manuals for the 1999model year and prior, see an authorizedINFINITI retailer, or contact:

DDS Distribution Services, Ltd.20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 44136

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuineINFINITI Owner’s Manuals for the 2001model year and prior, see an authorizedINFINITI retailer, or contact:

DDS Distribution Services, Ltd.20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

In Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITIService Manual or Owner’s Manual pleasecontact your nearest INFINITI retailer. For thephone number and location of an INFINITIretailer in your area call the INFINITI Satisfac-tion Center at 1-800-361-4792 and a bilingualINFINITI representative will assist you.

Also available are genuine INFINITI Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older INFINITI mod-els.


10-25

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In thisunlikely event, there is some important infor-mation you should know. Many insurancecompanies routinely authorize the use ofnon-genuine collision parts in order to cutcosts, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of GenuineINFINITI Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored usingparts made to INFINITI’s original exactingspecifications — if you want to help it to lastand hold its resale value, the solution issimple. Tell your insurance agent andyour repair shop to only use GenuineINFINITI Collision Parts. INFINITI does notwarrant non-INFINITI parts, nor doesINFINITI’s warranty apply to damage causedby a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine INFINITI Parts can help protectyour personal safety, preserve your warranty

protection and maintain the resale value ofyour vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased,using Genuine INFINITI Parts may prevent orlimit unnecessary excess wear and tear ex-penses at the end of your lease.

INFINITI designs its hoods with crumplezones to minimize the risk that the hood willpenetrate the windshield of your vehicle in anaccident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts maynot provide such built in safeguards. Also,non-genuine parts often show prematurewear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must beadvised if non-genuine parts are used torepair your vehicle. And somestates/provinces have enacted laws that re-strict insurance companies from authorizingthe use of non-genuine collision parts duringthe new vehicle warranty. These laws help

protect you, so you can take action to protectyourself.

It’s your right!


10-26

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

11 Index

A

ABS (Anti-lock brake system) .................................... 5-45Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front air bag system)... 1-15Side (See supplemental side air bag system)..... 1-17

Air bag warning labels ............................................... 1-21Air bag warning light........................................ 1-21, 2-14Air cleaner housing filter ............................................ 8-15Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ....................................... 4-3Air conditioner service ................................... 4-3, 4-6Air conditioner specification label ..................... 10-13Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricantrecommendations ......................................... 4-6, 10-8Heater and air conditioner (automatic).................. 4-3

Alcohol, drugs and driving........................................... 5-5Anchor point locations

Top tether strap ................................................... 1-46Antenna ....................................................................... 4-24Anti-lock Brake System (ABS).................................... 5-45Anti-lock brake warning light ..................................... 2-10Appearance care

Exterior appearance care........................................ 7-2Interior appearance care......................................... 7-4

Armrest.......................................................................... 1-8Ashtray (See cigarette lighter and ashtray) ................ 2-31ATP warning light....................................................... 2-11Audible reminders....................................................... 2-17Audio operation precautions......................................... 4-8Audio system ................................................................ 4-6

Steering wheel audio controls ............................. 4-23Autochanger

Compact Disc (CD).............................................. 4-20Automatic

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)..................... 8-10Drive positioner.................................................... 3-18Driving with automatic transmission ................... 5-11Seat positioner, seat ............................................ 3-18Transmission park warning light......................... 2-11Transmission selector lever lock release ............ 5-14

Avoiding collision and rollover .................................... 5-4

B

Back door.................................................................... 3-11Battery ......................................................................... 8-13

Battery saver system ............................................ 2-25Battery replacement, (See remote keyless entrysystem).......................................................................... 3-9

Before starting the engine ............................................ 5-9Belts (See drive belts) ................................................ 8-14Brake

Anti-lock brake system (ABS).............................. 5-45Brake booster ....................................................... 8-19Brake fluid............................................................ 8-12Brake pedal .......................................................... 8-18Brake pedal check................................................ 8-18Brake system........................................................ 5-45Parking brake check................................... 5-16, 8-18Parking brake operation....................................... 5-16Warning light ....................................................... 2-12

Break-in schedule ....................................................... 5-34Bulb check/instrument panel ...................................... 2-10Bulb replacement ........................................................ 8-22

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants............. 10-2Car phone or CB radio............................................... 4-25Cargo (See vehicle loading information) ................... 2-38Cargo net .................................................................... 2-38Cassette player (See audio system) ................. 4-13, 4-19Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst ........................ 5-3CD care and cleaning................................................. 4-22

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Child restraints ........................................................... 1-34Installation on front passenger seat .................... 1-47Installation on rear seat outboard positions........ 1-39Installation on rear seat center position.............. 1-36Precautions on child restraints............................ 1-34Top tether strap anchor point locations.............. 1-46With top tether strap............................................ 1-45

Child safety ................................................................. 1-26Child safety rear door lock........................................... 3-4Chimes, Audible reminders ........................................ 2-17Cigarette lighter and ashtray ...................................... 2-31Circuit breaker, Fusible link....................................... 8-20Cleaning exterior and interior............................... 7-2, 7-4Clock ........................................................................... 2-30Coin box ..................................................................... 2-32Cold weather driving .................................................. 5-47Compact Disc (CD) changer operation ...................... 4-20Compact Disc (CD) player (See audio system)........... 4-9Compass display .......................................................... 2-7Console box................................................................ 2-34Controls

Heater and air conditioner controls (automatic).... 4-3Steering wheel audio controls ............................. 4-23

CoolantCapacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants .... 10-2

Changing engine coolant....................................... 8-6Checking engine coolant level............................... 8-5

Corrosion protection ..................................................... 7-5Cover, Tonneau cover ................................................ 2-38Cruise control ............................................................. 5-17Cruise control, Intelligent cruise control system ....... 5-19Cup holders ................................................................ 2-33

D

Daytime running light system .................................... 2-27Defogger switch, Glass hatch and outside mirrordefogger switch........................................................... 2-22Determining vehicle payload capacity ...................... 10-14Dimensions and weights .......................................... 10-10Door open warning light ............................................ 2-13Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ............................. 5-5Drive belts................................................................... 8-14Drive positioner, Automatic........................................ 3-18Driving

Cold weather driving............................................ 5-47Driving with automatic transmission ................... 5-11On-pavement and offroad driving.......................... 5-4Precautions when starting and driving.................. 5-2

Safety precautions.................................................. 5-5

E

Economy, Fuel ............................................................ 5-34Electric sunroof ........................................................... 2-42Emission control information label .......................... 10-13Emission control system warranty............................ 10-22Engine

Before starting the engine...................................... 5-9Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 10-2Changing engine coolant....................................... 8-6Changing engine oil .............................................. 8-8Changing engine oil filter ...................................... 8-9Checking engine coolant level............................... 8-5Checking engine oil level ...................................... 8-7Coolant temperature gauge.................................... 2-5Engine block heater ............................................. 5-50Engine compartment check locations .................... 8-4Engine cooling system........................................... 8-5Engine oil ............................................................... 8-7Engine oil and oil filter recommendation............ 10-5Engine oil viscosity.............................................. 10-6Engine serial number......................................... 10-12Engine specifications ........................................... 10-9

INDEX

11-2

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

If your vehicle overheats...................................... 6-10Starting the engine............................................... 5-10

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .................................. 5-2

F

4WD shift switch operations ...................................... 5-39F .M.V.S.S. certification label ................................... 10-12Filter, Air cleaner housing filter ................................. 8-15Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch)............ 2-28Flat tire.......................................................................... 6-2Floor mat cleaning........................................................ 7-4Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)..................... 8-10Brake fluid............................................................ 8-12Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 10-2Engine coolant ....................................................... 8-5Engine oil ............................................................... 8-7Power steering fluid............................................. 8-11Window washer fluid ........................................... 8-12

FM-AM radio with cassette player ............................. 4-10FM-AM radio with cassette player and Compact Disc(CD) player/changer.................................................... 4-16Fog light switch .......................................................... 2-27Four wheel drive (4WD) ............................................. 5-35

Front air bag system (See supplemental restraintsystem)........................................................................ 1-15Front window operating with key ................................. 3-3Front fog light switch ................................................. 2-27Front power seat adjustment ........................................ 1-3Fuel

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 10-2filler cap ............................................................... 3-13filler lid................................................................. 3-13Fuel economy....................................................... 5-34Fuel octane rating ................................................ 10-3Fuel recommendation........................................... 10-3Gauge ..................................................................... 2-5

Fuses........................................................................... 8-19Fusible links ............................................................... 8-20

G

Garage door opener, HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver.................................................................. 2-47Gas cap ....................................................................... 3-13Gauge ............................................................................ 2-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge ........................ 2-5Fuel gauge ............................................................. 2-5Odometer ................................................................ 2-4

Speedometer........................................................... 2-4Tachometer............................................................. 2-4

General maintenance..................................................... 9-2Glass hatch and outside mirror defogger switch....... 2-22Glass hatch lock ......................................................... 3-12Glass hatch opener ..................................................... 3-12Glove box.................................................................... 2-34Glove box lock............................................................ 2-34

H

Hazard warning flasher switch.................................... 2-28Head restraints .............................................................. 1-7Headlights

Bulb replacement ................................................. 8-22Headlight switch................................................... 2-24Xenon headlights ................................................. 2-23

Heated seats................................................................ 2-29Heater

Engine coolant heater .......................................... 5-50Heater and air conditioner (automatic).................. 4-3

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver ............................. 2-47Hood, release .............................................................. 3-10Hook, Luggage hook .................................................. 2-36Horn ............................................................................ 2-28

INDEX

11-3

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

How to stop alarm, Vehicle security .......................... 2-19

I

Ignition switch .............................................................. 5-8Automatic transmission models........................... 5-11Key positions ......................................................... 5-9

Immobilizer system..................................................... 2-19In-cabin microfilter ....................................................... 4-6Indicator lights ............................................................ 2-15Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System, Engine start ........ 5-9Inside mirror ............................................................... 3-17Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ............................ 10-23Instrument panel ........................................................... 2-2Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system ...................... 5-19Interior light replacement............................................ 8-23Interior lights .............................................................. 2-45ISOFIX child restraint ................................................. 1-44

J

Jump starting ................................................................ 6-7

K

Keyfob battery replacement......................................... 8-21Keyless entry (See remote keyless entry system) ........ 3-5Keys .............................................................................. 3-2

L

Label, Air conditioner specification label ................. 10-13Label, Emission control information label ............... 10-13Label, F .M.V.S.S. certification label ........................ 10-12Labels

Air bag warning labels......................................... 1-21Engine serial number......................................... 10-12Vehicle identification number (VIN) .................. 10-11

LATCH system............................................................ 1-44Light

Air bag warning light........................................... 1-21Bulb replacement ................................................. 8-22Front fog light switch .......................................... 2-27Headlight switch................................................... 2-24Headlights Bulb replacement ............................... 8-22Interior lights........................................................ 2-45Personal light ....................................................... 2-46Replacement ......................................................... 8-22

Vanity mirror lights.............................................. 2-47Warning/indicator lights andaudible reminders ...................................... 2-10, 2-15Xenon headlights ................................................. 2-23

Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement........... 8-23Loading information (See vehicle loadinginformation)............................................................... 10-14Lock

Door locks.............................................................. 3-3Glass hatch lock .................................................. 3-12Glove box lock..................................................... 2-34Power door lock..................................................... 3-3

Low fuel warning light................................................ 2-14Luggage hooks ........................................................... 2-36Luggage rack .............................................................. 2-40Luggage storage (See vehicle loading information) .. 2-35

M

MaintenanceBattery .................................................................. 8-13Chassis and body ................................................ 9-12Emission control system...................................... 9-11General maintenance.............................................. 9-2Inside the vehicle................................................... 9-3

INDEX

11-4

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Maintenance precautions ....................................... 8-2Outside the vehicle ................................................ 9-3Periodic maintenance schedules............................ 9-5Seat belt maintenance.......................................... 1-34Under the hood and vehicle .................................. 9-4

Maintenance for offroad driving ( only) .... 9-11Meters and gauges ....................................................... 2-3Mirror

Inside mirror ........................................................ 3-17Outside mirror control ......................................... 3-17Outside mirrors .................................................... 3-17

N

Net, Cargo net ............................................................ 2-38New vehicle break-in .................................................. 5-34Nissan vehicle Immobilizer System............................ 2-18

O

Odometer....................................................................... 2-4Oil

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 10-2Changing engine oil .............................................. 8-8Changing engine oil filter ...................................... 8-9

Checking engine oil level ...................................... 8-7Engine oil ............................................................... 8-7Engine oil viscosity.............................................. 10-6

Outside mirror control ................................................ 3-17Outside mirrors ........................................................... 3-17Outside temperature display ......................................... 2-6Overdrive switch ......................................................... 5-15Overheat, If your vehicle overheats ............................ 6-10Owner’s Manual/Service Manual orderinformation ................................................................ 10-25

P

ParkingBrake check.......................................................... 8-18Parking brake check............................................. 5-16Parking brake operation....................................... 5-16Parking on hills ................................................... 5-16

Parking/parking on hills ............................................. 5-43Payload weight capacity ........................................... 10-16Periodic maintenance schedules .................................. 9-5Personal light.............................................................. 2-46Phone, Car phone or CB radio .................................. 4-25Power

Front seat adjustment ............................................ 1-3

Power door lock..................................................... 3-3Power outlet ......................................................... 2-30Power steering fluid............................................. 8-11Power steering system......................................... 5-44Power windows .................................................... 2-41

Pre-tensioner seat belt system ................................... 1-19Precautions

Audio operation precautions.................................. 4-8Cruise control precautions................................... 5-17Driving safety ......................................................... 5-5Maintenance precautions ....................................... 8-2On child restraints ............................................... 1-34On seat belt usage............................................... 1-23On-pavement and offroad driving precautions ...... 5-4Precautions on supplemental restraint system...... 1-8Precautions when starting and driving.................. 5-2

Push starting................................................................. 6-9

R

Rack, Luggage rack .................................................... 2-40Radio ............................................................................. 4-6

Car phone or CB radio........................................ 4-25Steering wheel audio controls ............................. 4-23

INDEX

11-5

Z 02.6.26/JR50-D X

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)test (US only) ........................................................... 10-23Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock ................ 3-4Rear power point ........................................................ 2-30Rear seat adjustment .................................................... 1-4Rear window wiper and washer switch ...................... 2-21Registering your vehicle in another country ............ 10-11Remote keyless entry system ....................................... 3-5Reporting safety defects (US only)........................... 10-23Roadside assistance program....................................... 6-2Rollover ......................................................................... 5-4

S

SafetyChild seat belts.................................................... 1-26Reporting safety defects (US only).................... 10-23Towing safety..................................................... 10-18

SeatBelt warning light................................................. 1-23Belt warning light and chime .............................. 2-14Driver side memory ............................................. 3-18

Seat adjustmentFront power seat adjustment ................................. 1-3Rear seat adjustment.............................................. 1-4

Seat belt(s)Child safety .......................................................... 1-26Infants and small children ................................... 1-27Injured persons .................................................... 1-27Larger children..................................................... 1-27Pre-tensioner seat belt system ............................ 1-19Precautions on seat belt usage ........................... 1-23Pregnant women .................................................. 1-27Seat belt cleaning .................................................. 7-5Seat belt extenders............................................... 1-33Seat belt hook...................................................... 1-31Seat belt maintenance.......................................... 1-34Seat belts ............................................................. 1-23Three-point type with retractor ............................ 1-28Two-point type without retractor (rear center lapbelt) ...................................................................... 1-31

Seat(s)Heated seats......................................................... 2-29Seats....................................................................... 1-2

Security system, vehicle security system................... 2-18Security systems (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System),Engine start ................................................................. 2-19Security systems (See vehicle security system) ........ 2-18Servicing air conditioner....................................... 4-3, 4-6Shift lock release ........................................................ 5-14

Shifting, Automatic transmission................................ 5-11Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front seats ...... 1-30Side air bag system (See supplemental side air bagsystem)........................................................................ 1-17Spark plugs................................................................. 8-15Speedometer ................................................................. 2-4Starting

Before starting the engine...................................... 5-9Jump starting ......................................................... 6-7Precautions when starting and driving.................. 5-2Push starting.......................................................... 6-9Starting the engine............................................... 5-10

SteeringPower steering fluid............................................. 8-11Power steering system......................................... 5-44Steering wheel switch for audio controls............ 4-23Tilting steering wheel........................................... 3-15

Storage ........................................................................ 2-32Sun shade ................................................................... 2-43Sun visors................................................................... 3-16Sunglasses holder ...................................................... 2-32Sunroof ....................................................................... 2-42

Electric sunroof .................................................... 2-42Supplemental air bag warning labels ......................... 1-21Supplemental air bag warning light ................. 1-21, 2-14

INDEX

11-6

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Supplemental front air bag system ............................ 1-15Supplemental restraint system...................................... 1-8

Precautions on supplemental restraint system...... 1-8Supplemental side air bag system ............................. 1-17Switch

4WD shift switch operations................................ 5-39Audio control ....................................................... 4-23Front fog light switch .......................................... 2-27Glass hatch and outside mirrordefogger switch.................................................... 2-22Hazard warning flasher switch............................. 2-28Headlight switch................................................... 2-24Ignition switch........................................................ 5-8Ignition switch automatic transmission models .. 5-11Overdrive switch................................................... 5-15Power door lock switch ......................................... 3-4Turn signal switch ............................................... 2-27

T

Tachometer ................................................................... 2-4Temperature display ..................................................... 2-6Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperaturegauge ............................................................................ 2-5

Theft (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System), Enginestart ............................................................................. 2-19Three way catalyst ........................................................ 5-3Tilting steering wheel ................................................. 3-15Tire

Flat tire ................................................................... 6-2Uniform tire quality grading .............................. 10-21

TiresTire chains ........................................................... 8-31Tire placard ........................................................ 10-13Tire pressure ........................................................ 8-29Tire rotation.......................................................... 8-31Types of tires....................................................... 8-30wheel/tire size .................................................... 10-10Wheels and tires .................................................. 8-29

Tonneau cover ............................................................ 2-38Top tether strap child restraints................................. 1-45Towing

Tow truck towing ................................................. 6-11Towing a trailer.................................................. 10-16Towing load/specification chart......................... 10-16Towing safety..................................................... 10-18

Trailer towing............................................................ 10-16Transceiver, HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver ........ 2-47Transfer case shifting procedures .............................. 5-35

TransmissionAutomatic transmission fluid (ATF)..................... 8-10Driving with automatic transmission ................... 5-11Transmission selector lever lock release ............ 5-14

Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system) ........... 3-5Traveling or registering your vehicle in anothercountry ...................................................................... 10-11Turn signal switch...................................................... 2-27

U

Underbody cleaning ...................................................... 7-3Uniform tire quality grading ..................................... 10-21

V

Vanity mirror lights..................................................... 2-47Vehicle

Dimensions and weights.................................... 10-10Identification number (VIN)................................ 10-11Loading information........................................... 10-14Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)....................... 6-14Security system.................................................... 2-18

Ventilators ..................................................................... 4-2

INDEX

11-7

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

W

WarningHazard warning flasher switch............................. 2-28Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders ............................................................. 2-10

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels..................... 1-21Warning light

4WD warning light............................................... 5-41Air bag warning light................................. 1-21, 2-14Anti-lock brake warning light .............................. 2-10Automatic transmission park warning light......... 2-11Brake warning light.............................................. 2-12Door open warning light...................................... 2-13Low fuel warning light......................................... 2-14Seat belt warning light and chime ...................... 2-14

Warning lights ............................................................ 2-10Warranty, Emission control system warranty........... 10-22Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 2-21Windshield wiper and washer switch .................. 2-21

Washing ........................................................................ 7-2Waxing .......................................................................... 7-3Weights (See dimensions and weights)................... 10-10Wheel/tire size .......................................................... 10-10

Wheels and tires ......................................................... 8-29Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels........................... 7-3

Window washer fluid .................................................. 8-12Window(s)

Cleaning ................................................................. 7-3Power windows .................................................... 2-41

Windshield wiper and washer switch......................... 2-21Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 2-21Windshield wiper and washer switch .................. 2-21Wiper blades ........................................................ 8-16

X

Xenon headlights ........................................................ 2-23

INDEX

11-8

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

GAS STATIONINFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)number (Research octane number 91).

For improved vehicle performance, INFINITIrecommends the use of unleaded premiumgasoline with an octane rating of at least 91AKI number (Research octane number 96).

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol devices and systems, andcould also affect warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, since thiswill damage the three way catalyst.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants” in the “10.

Technical and consumer information” section.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDA-TION:O API Certification Mark

O API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & IIor API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving

O ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III

O SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for allambient temperatures.See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “10. Technical and con-sumer information” section for engine oiland oil filter recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:See tire placard affixed to the glove box lid.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PRO-CEDURE RECOMMENDATION:During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ofvehicle use, follow the recommendations out-lined in the “Break-in schedule” Informationfound in the “5. Starting and driving” section ofthis Owner’s Manual. Follow these recommen-dations for the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle.

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

SIT0114

Engine coolant 8-5

Engine oil 8-7

Power steering fluid 8-11

Brake fluid 8-12

Meters and gauges 2-3

Seat belt 1-23

Hood release 3-10

Door lock 3-3

Back door lock 3-11

Fuel 3-13, 10-2Glass hatch lock andopener 3-12

Spare tire 6-3

Air conditioner 4-3Audio system 4-6

Automatic transmissionfluid 8-10

Battery 8-13

Window washer fluid 8-12

Z 02.6.5/JR50-D X

Documents

2003 Infiniti QX4 - Dealer.com · 2019-07-27 · features to all occupants of the vehicle. O Always review this Owner’s Manual for important safety infor-mation. As with other vehicles